ICX Section 700 Feature Operation Ver 5

ICX Section 700 Feature Operation Ver 5

Panasonic Telephone Systems

Panasonic

www.voicesonic.com

Phone 877-289-2829

Section 700

Feature

Operation

a

Technical Manual

Supports ICX Version 5.0

ICX Version 5.0 (International)

Issued October 2000

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by the Matsushita Communication Industrial Co. Ltd. (MCI). MCI reserves the right, without notice, to make changes to equipment design as advances in engineering and manufacturing methods warrant.

The software and hardware described in this document may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the license pertaining to said software or hardware.

Reproduction, publication, or duplication of this manual, or any part thereof, in any manner, mechanically, electronically, or photographically, is prohibited without permission of the Matsushita Communication Industrial Co. Ltd. (MCI).

Copyright 2000 by Matsushita Communication Industrial Co. Ltd. (MCI)

All rights reserved.

Contents

Chapter 1. About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Chapter 2. List of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 3. System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

AEC Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Attendant Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Automatic Call Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Automatic Route Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Background Music/MOH Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Battery Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Building Block Expansion Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Built-In Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Call Progress Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Caller ID Alpha Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Centrex/PBX Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Class of Service - Trunk/Tie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Class of Service - Extension Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Day/Night System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Manual Day/Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Automatic Day/Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Digital Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Direct Inward System Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Distinctive Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Doorphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Doorphone Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Extension Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Digital Key Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Analog Device Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

DP/DTMF SLTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 iii

Contents Section 700 - Operation

Flexible Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Flexible Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Hunting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Pilot Terminal Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Pilot Distributed Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Switch Back Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Circular Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Next Extension/Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Internal Hold Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

MCO Tenant Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Music-on-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Extension Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Speed Dial Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Network Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Network Attendant Reversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Network Call Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Network Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Network Centralized Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Network Centralized Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Network Extension Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Network Flash Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Network Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Network Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Network Transfer Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Tandem Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Non-Blocking Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Power Failure Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Power On Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Programming Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Telephone Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

PC-Based Customizing Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

QSIG ISDN Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Ringing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

DDI (DID) Day/Night Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Busy Lamp Field Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Slide Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Alarm Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

System Speed Dial TRS (Call Barring) Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Toll Restriction Service (Call Barring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Trunk Access Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Trunk Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

iv ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Contents

Trunk Interface - DDI (Not Available on UK, TX or EX Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Trunk Interface - ISDN BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Trunk Interface - ISDN-PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Trunk Interface - Loop Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Trunk Ringing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

DDI Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Direct Line Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Direct Inward System Access Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Multiple Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Virtual Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Virtual Port used for Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Voice Mail Integration (Third Party) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Answer Supervision for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Disconnect Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

High Priority Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Message Key ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Voice Mail Transfer Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Chapter 4. User Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

About User Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Set Absence Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Set Caller ID Logging Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Set Day of Week Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Set Exception Day Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Set Extension Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Set Message Key ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Set Mode Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Set Personal Speed Dial Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Set Send Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Set Special Day Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Set System Date/Time/Day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Set System Speed Dial Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Set System Speed Dial Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Set System Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Set Text Message Replies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Set Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 v

Contents Section 700 - Operation

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Absence Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Auto Repeat Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Background Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Call Forwarding-All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Trunk Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Trunk Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Caller ID Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Call Log Operation on a Small Display Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Call Log Operation on a Large Display Key Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Camp-on (Call Waiting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Directory Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Display Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Large-Display Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Small-Display Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Changing the Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

DP to DTMF Signal Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

DSS/72 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

EM/24 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Flexible Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

vi ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Contents

Handsfree Answerback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Handsfree Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Headset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Hot Dial Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Line Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

DSS/BLF Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

DIL Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

MCO Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Message Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Message Waiting/Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Mute Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Offhook Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Offhook Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

One-Touch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Onhook Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Ringing Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Silent Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Speed Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Speed Dial Name Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Station Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Step Call (Reset Call). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Trunk Key Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

MCO Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

MCO Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Trunk Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Universal Night Answer to Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Variable Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Zip Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 vii

Contents Section 700 - Operation

Chapter 6. DSLT Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Digital Single Line Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Absence Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Auto Repeat Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Background Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Call Forwarding-All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Floating Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Trunk Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Trunk Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Camp-On (Call Waiting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

DP to DTMF Signal Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Message Waiting/Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Offhook Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Onhook Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

viii ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Contents

Speed Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Station Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Step Call (Reset Call). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

MCO Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Trunk Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Universal Night Answer to Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Chapter 7. SLT Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Absence Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Non-Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Attendant Group Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Callback Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Call Forwarding - All Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Call Forwarding - Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Call Forwarding - No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

System Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Floating Hold (Retrieve Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Broker’s Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Extension Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Extension Direct Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Trunk Group Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Trunk Direct Pickup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Supervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Unsupervised Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Camp-On (Call Waiting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Conference Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Do-Not-Disturb (DND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Flash Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ix

Contents Section 700 - Operation

Hot Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Intercom Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Message Waiting/Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Offhook Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Offhook Voice Announce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Meet-Me Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Speed Dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Personal Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

System Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Speed Dial Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Station Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Step Call (Reset Call). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Timed Reminder Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

MCO Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Trunk Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Universal Night Answer to Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Appendix A: SBS/VB-9 A-Series Telephone Features. . . . . . . . . . 317

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

x ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Chapter 1. About This Manual

If you are using this manual for a single System, make note of its software version in the following table. This information may be referenced by technicians or owners of the System.

Software version information for systems shipped with this document

CPC Model: Software Version:

Organization

This manual contains detailed descriptions of features. The feature descriptions are organized according to the following categories:

Feature Categories

System Features

User Maintenance

Key Telephone Features

Digital Single-Line Telephone (DSLT) Features

Single Line Telephone

(SLT) Features

*SBS/A-Series (UK) and VB-9/A-Series (TW)

Features

Description

System Features are either available on a systemwide basis or aid in the overall administration of the

System.

User Maintenance Features are used by the end user to maintain the System. These items include setting time and date, Personal Speed Dial (PSD) numbers and names, System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers and names, extension names, Verified ID codes, Call

Forward ID codes for Voice Mail, Message Key ID codes, Mode schedule, Special Day mode, Exception Day mode, and Day of Week mode.

Key Telephone Features are available to System Key phones. System Key phones are proprietary digital sets that provide feature access through a combination of feature keys and access codes.

DSLT Features are available to DSLTs. DSLTs provide digital audio quality and limited feature key access in a single-line set.

SLT Features are available on a standard analog push button telephone set. Since SLTs are not equipped with feature keys, most features are accessed by using the dialpad and/or the switchhook.

Beginning with Version 4.0, the ICX system can be used with SBS/A-Series (UK only) and VB-9/A-

Series (TW only) telephones. See Appendix A for a list of differences between ICX key telephone features and those avaibable on the SBS/VB-9, A-

Series telephones.

* See Appendix A

11 ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000

Chapter 1. About This Manual Section 700 - Operation

Purpose

The purpose of this manual is to provide an overview of feature operations and requirements. Where applicable, the following types of information are provided for each feature:

Types of Information

Description

Operation

Hardware Requirements

Related Programming

Considerations

Purpose

Provides an overview of how the feature works and, in some cases, what it is typically used for

Includes step-by-step instructions on how to use the feature

Lists any special hardware that is required to use the feature

Lists the programming subsystems associated with the feature

Provides details on feature interactions and limitations

Abbreviation List

ACD Automatic Call Distributor

ARS Automatic Route Selection

BGM Background Music

BLF Busy Lamp Field

BRI Basic Rate Interface

CFWD Call Forward

COS Class of Service

CTAPI Computer Telephony Application Programming Interface

CTI Computer Telephony Integration

DDI Direct Dial Inward

DID Direct Inward Dialing

DIL Direct In Line

DISA Direct Inward System Access

DL Direct Line

DN Directory Number

DND Do-Not-Disturb

DP Dial Pulse

DSLT Digital Single Line Telephone

DSS Direct Station Selector

DSU Digital Service Unit

DTMF Dual Tone Multifrequency

FF Flexible Function

HD High Density

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

LCR Least Cost Routing

MCO Multiple CO (Pooled Trunk Access)

MIS Management Information System

MOH Music On Hold

PNPDNPhantom Non-Primary Directory Number

PSD Personal Speed Dial

SMDR Station Message Detail Recorder

SPI Service Provider Interface

12 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

SSD System Speed Dial

TAPI Telephony Application Programming Interface

TRS Toll Restriction Service

Chapter 1. About This Manual

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 13

Chapter 1. About This Manual Section 700 - Operation

14 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Chapter 2. List of Features

This chapter contains the following tables which list the features available with the System:

System Features

Maintenance Features

Extension Features

Table Page

16

17

18

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 15

Chapter 2. List of Features

Table 1.

System Features

Topic

AEC Disconnect

Attendant Groups

Automatic Call Distributor

Automatic Route Selection

Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer

Background Music/MOH Separation

Battery Backup

Building Block Expansion Capability

Built-In Voice Mail

Call Progress Tones

Caller ID

Centrex/PBX Compatibility

Class of Service

Data Security

Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)

Day/Night System Mode

Digital Pad

Direct Inward System Access

Distinctive Ringing

Doorphone

Extension Interface

Flexible Numbering Plan

Flexible Slot

Hunting Groups

Internal Hold Tone

MCO Tenant Group

Memory Backup

Music-on-Hold

Name Assignments

Network Facilities

Non-Blocking Architecture

Power Failure Transfer

Power On Maintenance

Programming Devices

QSIG ISDN Lines

16 ICX (International) issued October 2000

49

49

50

56

46

46

48

48

58

58

59

59

60

42

42

43

45

36

36

40

41

29

31

31

36

27

28

28

29

Page

24

24

25

26

27

27

Section 700 - Operation

ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Topic

Ringing Modes

System Speed Dial TRS (Call Barring) Override

Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging)

Trunk Access Groups

Trunk Interface

Trunk Ringing Types

Virtual Port

Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)

Table 2.

Maintenance Features

Topic

Set Absence Messages

Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension

Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail

Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension

Set Caller ID Logging Extensions

Set Day of Week Mode

Set Exception Day Mode

Set Extension Names

Set Message Key ID Code

Set Mode Schedule

Set Personal Speed Dial Names

Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers

Set Send Text Messages

Set Special Day Mode

Set System Date/Time/Day

Set System Speed Dial Index

Set System Speed Dial Names

Set System Speed Dial Numbers

Set Text Message Replies

Set Verified Account Codes

Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes

98

112

100

107

89

90

91

93

83

84

85

87

Page

80

81

82

108

109

111

112

113

115

Page

60

65

63

65

67

68

71

72

Chapter 2. List of Features

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 17

Chapter 2. List of Features

Table 3.

Extension Features

Topic

Absence Message

Account Codes

Attendant Group Calls

Auto Repeat Dial

Background Music

Busy Override

Callback Request

Call Forwarding

Call Hold

Call Transfer

Caller ID Call Log

Camp-on (Call Waiting)

Conference Calls

Directory Numbers

Display Information

Do-Not-Disturb

DP to DTMF Signal Conversion

DSS/72 Console

EM/24 Console

Flash

Flexible Function Keys

Handsfree Answerback

Handsfree Operation

Headset Operation

Hot Dial Pad

Hot Line

Intercom Calling

Last Number Redial

Line Appearances

Message Key

Message Waiting/Callback

Mute Function

Offhook Monitor

Offhook Signalling

Offhook Voice Announce

18 ICX (International) issued October 2000

172

173

174

177

170

170

171

172

178

179

180

180

181

162

162

163

169

157

159

161

161

144

149

151

153

128

129

133

142

Page

120

122

124

125

126

127

Section 700 - Operation

ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Topic

One-Touch Keys

Onhook Dialling

Paging

Ringing Line Preference

Room Monitoring

Silent Monitor

Speed Dialling

Station Lockout

Step Call (Reset Call)

Timed Reminder Call

Trunk Access

Trunk Queuing

Universal Night Answer to Page

Voice Recognition

Volume Control

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service

Zip Mode

205

206

209

210

190

192

202

204

Page

184

185

186

188

188

212

213

214

215

Chapter 2. List of Features

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 19

Chapter 2. List of Features

This page intentionally left blank.

Section 700 - Operation

20 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Chapter 3. System Features

System Features are either available on a system-wide basis or aid in the overall administration of the

System.

This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the following System Features:

Topic

AEC Disconnect

Attendant Groups

Automatic Call Distributor

Automatic Route Selection

Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer

Background Music/MOH Separation

Battery Backup

Building Block Expansion Capability

Built-In Voice Mail

Call Progress Tones

Caller ID

Caller ID Alpha Tagging

Centrex/PBX Compatibility

Class of Service

Class of Service - Trunk/Tie

Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction

Class of Service - Extension Feature

Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction

Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers

Data Security

Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) (Summer Time)

Day/Night System Mode

Manual Day/Night Mode

Automatic Day/Night Mode

Digital Pad

Direct Inward System Access

Distinctive Ringing

Doorphone

Doorphone Sensor

Extension Interface

Digital Key Telephones

Analog Device Capability

Page

41

42

42

43

43

43

44

36

36

37

40

40

33

35

35

36

31

31

32

32

28

29

29

30

27

27

27

28

24

24

25

26

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 21

Chapter 3. System Features

22

Topic

DP/DTMF SLTs

ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface

ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface

Flexible Numbering Plan

Flexible Slot

Hunting Groups

Internal Hold Tone

MCO Tenant Group

Memory Backup

Music-on-Hold

Name Assignments

Extension Name Assignments

Speed Dial Name Assignments

Network Facilities

Network Attendant Reversion

Network Call Routing

Network Call Transfer

Network Centralized Voice Mail

Network Extension Calling

Network Flash Transfer

Network Hold

Network Paging

Network Transfer Recall

Tandem Connection

Non-Blocking Architecture

Power Failure Transfer

Power On Maintenance

Programming Devices

Telephone Programming

PC-Based Customizing Tool

QSIG ISDN Lines

Ringing Modes

Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing

Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing

DDI (DID) Day/Night Ringing

DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing

Busy Lamp Field Ringing

ICX (International) issued October 2000

Page

59

60

60

60

58

58

59

59

61

61

61

62

62

57

57

58

58

56

57

57

57

54

56

56

56

49

49

50

50

46

46

48

48

44

44

45

45

Section 700 - Operation

ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Topic

Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing

Slide Ringing

Alarm Ringing

Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging)

System Speed Dial TRS (Call Barring) Override

Trunk Access Groups

Trunk Interface

Trunk Interface - DDI (Not Available on UK, TX or EX

Model)

Trunk Interface - ISDN BRI

Trunk Interface - ISDN-PRI

Trunk Interface - Loop Start

Trunk Ringing Types

DDI Ringing

Direct Line Ringing

DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement

Direct Inward System Access Ringing

Multiple Ringing

Virtual Port

Virtual Port used for Floating Hold

Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension

Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)

Answer Supervision for Voice Mail

Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail

CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code

Disconnect Signal

High Priority Message Waiting

Message Key ID Code

Voice Mail Transfer Key

Page

65

66

67

67

62

62

63

63

72

72

72

73

71

71

71

71

74

74

74

75

68

69

70

69

67

68

68

68

Chapter 3. System Features

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 23

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

AEC Disconnect

Description

This feature allows the System to send a disconnect signal of 1 second to an analog device indicating that the calling party has hung up (terminated the call). This feature is useful with a Third-party Voice

Mail or an Answering Machine. By default this feature is disabled.

Hardware Requirements

• AEC port

Considerations

• The 1 second time duration of the disconnect signal is fixed. (It cannot be changed.)

Attendant Groups

Description

An attendant phone is often used as a central answering point for other extensions. In addition, attendant phones frequently have special capabilities for monitoring and programming extensions.

You can reach the assigned attendant group by dialling the feature access code for Attendant Calls

(usually 0). If an attendant phone is available but does not answer within a set time, the call will move to the next available attendant phone. If all members of the attendant group are busy for a specified time, the call can be forwarded to other extensions or another hunt group. The system allows up to 20 extensions to be included in an attendant group.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The System allows one attendant group for each system mode (Day 1, Day 2, and Night).

• An attendant group can contain both real extensions and virtual extensions. If virtual, several phones can be made to ring at the same time.

• Attendant groups can use only Pilot Terminal Hunt Group or Pilot Distributed Hunt Group. For

more information, see “Hunting Groups” on page 46.

• The pilot number for an attendant group is flexible (i.e., any extension number can be designated as the pilot [not a real extension]).

• If a member of the attendant group has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) or Call Forwarding - All set, that phone is temporarily removed from the attendant group.

• If a member of the attendant group has Call Forwarding - Busy set and the extension is busy, the call goes to the next phone in the attendant group.

• If all members are busy for the duration of the busy queuing timer, the call can be forwarded to another hunt group or another extension.

• Attendant groups support the following call types:

• CLI (Called Line Identification) / Direct Dial Inward (DDI)

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

• Extension calls

24 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

• Private network attendant calls

• Call reversion

• Call forwarded to Attendant Hunt Group

Chapter 3. System Features

Automatic Call Distributor

Description

The System provides an optional Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) for efficient presentation, handling, and management of incoming calls to one or more groups of specialized users.

This optional Built-in ACD is contained on a single circuit card that is installed in the System. This

“built-in” capability eliminates the need for custom wiring and other installation.

Each specialized user is known as an ACD agent. Each agent position is equipped with a large display telephone (VB-44225/VB-D411LDSUK) that provides Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) messages to assist the agent in handling calls.

The Built-in ACD provides:

• Up to 3 agent groups (ACD Version 3.0 and higher)

• Up to 2 agent groups (ACD Version below 3.0)

• Up to 32 agent IDs per group

• Up to 64 agent IDs per system (ACD Version 2.0 and higher)

• Up to 32 agents

• Up to 6 supervisor IDs per system (ACD Version 3.0 and higher)

• Up to 2 supervisor IDs per system (ACD Version below 3.0)

• Up to 4 voice ports per group

• Up to 4 voice ports per system

• 1 Music-On-Hold (MOH) source (Main System MOH source)

• 1 Management Information System (MIS) Monitor Port (RS-232C)

• Abandoned Call Report counter available with MIS reports (This is not the same as the

Abandoned Call Timer added to the Station Message Detail Recorder [SMDR] reports.)

• 2-week memory for MIS reports

• Up to 6 recorded messages (flexible length, max. 96 sec. per system) (ACD Version 3.0 and higher)

• In Version 4.0 and higher, the Silent Monitor feature has been added. This feature allows an

ACD supervisor to monitor a call between an ACD agent and a caller without the knowledge

of either party. For more information, See “Silent Monitor” on page 190, Section 400 -

Programming, and Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.

• In addition to MOH, ACD Version 4.0 provides up to eight analog extension ports that can be connected to a recorded announcement device. See Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference

Manual.

• Up to 6 recorded messages (max. 14 sec. per message) (ACD Version below 3.0)

• Zip Tone which automatically answers calls when an agent is using the Headset mode (CPC

Version 3.5 and higher)

• Wrap Mode which allows an agent to complete any paperwork before becoming available to take another call. (CPC Version 3.5 and higher)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 25

Chapter 3. System Features

Hardware Requirements

• See Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.

Considerations

• For more information, see Section 520 - Built-In ACD Reference Manual.

Section 700 - Operation

Automatic Route Selection

Description

When Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is enabled, the system follows a preselected route for calls.

Usually the selected routing is the least cost route.

ARS works in conjunction with Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring). Calls can be denied based on the programmed TRS (Call Barring) level for the originating party. (For more information,

see “Ringing Modes” on page 60.)

• Three levels of ARS checking are available based on the dialled number following the ARS access code:

Direct Route Selection: The simplest form of ARS routing that upon ARS entry

(enter 9) directly selects a trunk group and any dialled number modification.

Route List Selection: A more complex routing that includes up to 5 alternative levels of route selection and includes TRS (Call Barring) level checking.

Time List Selection: The most complex routing that determines the appropriate route list based upon the day and time.

• Forced ARS is available on an Extension Class of Service (COS) basis.

• A special day list provides tailored ARS routing for up to 20 holidays, vacation days, etc.

• Automatic modification of dialled numbers is available. This includes deleting up to 24 prefix digits and adding up to a 10-digit prefix and a 10-digit suffix. The modification of dialled numbers can include pauses, Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) conversion, itemized code

(extension number) and an authorization code. (Itemized code and authorization are not used in some areas.)

• Up to 8 authorization codes are available.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

26 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer

Description

The System can be set to automatically transfer trunk calls out to another trunk without requiring the call to be answered internally. This transfer may be either trunk based or extension based (i.e., call forward outside).

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Background Music/MOH Separation

Description

Separate inputs are provided for Background Music and Music-on-Hold (MOH). This allows one music or sound source to be used for background music and another music or sound source to be used for music on hold.

A typical advantage of this is playing a pre-recorded promotional tape to held parties (since many may be customers) while providing a selected background music for use in the office.

Hardware Requirements

• Background music requires an SCC card (VB-44181).

• Both Background Music and Music on Hold (if using external MOH) require a sound source.

Considerations

• N/A

Battery Backup

Description

When backup batteries are installed, the System will continue to operate in the event of a power failure. If using Battery Backup, backup batteries must be installed in each CCU.

A fully loaded System will operate at least 30 minutes on backup batteries for the ICX.

Hardware Requirements

• Back-up battery unit (VB-44025)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 27

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

• Any device connected to the System but that does not derive its power from the System must have a backup power source to operate. These devices include any System Message Detail

Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging) printer (or recorder), fax machine, answering machine, modem, cordless telephone, etc.

Building Block Expansion Capability

Description

The System is designed to support easy expansion. Each CCU in the System supports 96 ports (12 flexible slots) as well as 2 option slots. Up to 6 CCUs may be installed in the System for a total of 576 ports.

Up to 2 expansion CCUs may be connected to a base CCU. When a fourth CCU is required, another base CCU is installed. Up to 2 expansion CCUs may be connected to the second base CCU.

This building block approach allows you to easily add equipment when needed without a major interruption in service or a major delay.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• In addition to the additional CCUs and related CCU hardware/cabling required for expansion, when the System is expanded the CPC card and/or TSW cards may need to be upgraded as well.

The CPC96 supports up to 96 ports. The CPC288 supports up to 288 ports and should be combined with time switch card TSW288. The CPC-576 supports up to 576 ports and should be combined with time switch card TSW576.

Built-In Voice Mail

Description

The System supports the Built-in Voice Mail. This unit assists in providing reliable, effective communications. This is a simple device that includes an automated attendant function and can be used to record conversations (where permitted).

The Built-in Voice Mail is easy to install. It is installed in a CCU card slot and no cabling is required.

Some of the major features include:

• Automated attendant

• Automatic recording for incoming and outgoing calls

• One-touch mail box transfer

• Mail box status display (Key Light Emitting Diode [LED] on digital telephone)

• Mail box grouping

• 2-way recording

28 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

• Outside notification

• Date/time stamp

• Integrated Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) control (with large LCD telephone)

• Message light control

• Up to 254 mail boxes

• Up to 40 hours of message storage time

• Up to 16 voice ports

For more information, see the System Built-In Voice Mail With Two-way Recording Reference

Manual.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Call Progress Tones

Description

The System supplies a full array of call progress tones. These tones provide audible indications of the status of calls and include dial tone, busy tone, ringback tone, error tone, confirmation tone, and splash tone. The complete specification for these tones may be found in Section 300 - Installation.

In addition to call progress tones, Direct Station Select (DSS) Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and the display provide additional indication of the status of calls.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Caller ID

Description

(Note: Analog Caller ID is not available in the UK model).

A properly equipped system supports Caller ID, a service offered by the network telephone service provider. The Exchange sends calling number information to the system after the first ring. Users with display telephones can see Caller ID information as incoming calls ring at their extension. They can also access previous calls via the Caller ID Call Log feature. The Caller ID number is recorded in Call

Logging.

Prior to Version 4.0, the system would not display Caller ID information for an extension that was in use when a call was received. In Version 4.0 or higher, Caller ID information is displayed on the

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 29

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation second line of an LCD display when an incoming call is received during conversation. If the second incoming call is from another extension, the LCD displays the extension name or number.

Hardware Requirements

• Loop-start exchange line card (8) (VB-44510UK) with Caller ID circuit card (8) (VB-44513UK),

Loop-start exchange line card (4) (VB-44514UK) with Caller ID circuit card (4) (VB-44515UK),

ISDN (PRI = VB-44540UK, BRI = VB-44530UK).

Related Programming

• FF2-0: Caller ID

• FF2-0: Caller ID Ring Control

• FF3-0: Call Duration Display

• FF1-0-01: Alpha Tagging (Name/No. Display)

Considerations

• ISDN (PRI/BRI - T Point) can get calling party information.

• Caller ID service must be ordered from the local telephone operating company or the interexchange carrier.

• Caller ID data is usually sent between the first and the second rings of the incoming trunk call.

The trunk may be programmed to immediately ring at the station or wait until after the Caller ID digits are received before ringing at the station. If the trunk is programmed to ring immediately, the Caller ID digits will not display until after they are received and processed.

• Caller ID numbers may be denied from being sent for some callers (private). Some long distance carriers may not provide Caller ID data (out of area).

• Caller ID only support the single format (number only). Multiple format (number and name) is not supported.

• Prior to Version 4.0, Caller ID supported only the number format. Version 4.0 and higher supports selection of the number or name.

• In Version 4.0, Caller ID displays the highest ringing priority call (call queued to ring at the target extension immediately after the present call terminates).

Caller ID Alpha Tagging

CPC-96, CPC-288, and CPC-576 Version 3.0

Description

If the received Caller ID phone number matches any number in the System Speed Dials (SSD)

(SSD000-SSD199), then the associated SSD name can be displayed as the Caller ID information instead of the Caller ID phone number. Alternatively, the Direct Dial Inward (DDI) name may be displayed instead.

In Version 4.0 and higher, Caller ID information will be shown on the second line of the LCD display when an incoming call rings a display phone with a conversation already in progress. Second incoming calls include extension Camp-on, extension Call Wait, queued DIL, both Appearance and non-Appearance calls (Exchange Line, MCO, virtual or DN, recall, BLF).

Hardware Requirements

• Loop-start trunk card (VB-44510 or VB44514)

30 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

• Caller ID circuit card (VB-44513 or VB-44515)

• ISDN (PRI = VB-44540UK, BRI = VB-44530UK)

Considerations

• The system may be set to display Caller ID in one of two priorities as follows:

Priority Choice 1

• CID name (future feature)

• Alpha tagging if matched

• DDI name

Priority Choice 2

• DDI name

• CID name (future feature)

• Alpha tagging if matched

• Currently Caller ID only supports the single format (number only). Multiple format (number and name) is not currently available but is planned as a future feature.

• Caller ID Call Logging only shows the CID number.

Centrex/PBX Compatibility

Description

Centrex/PBX Compatibility allows the System to be connected behind centrex or PBX lines.

The System supports up to 6 access codes for dialling centrex or a PBX. These access codes allow the

System, System Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging) output to exclude the number dialled to reach a centrex or PBX line.

When connected behind a PBX or Centrex, Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) can be used to restrict calls.

The System also supports transmission of a flash signal over the centrex or PBX link.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Class of Service

Description

A Class of Service (COS) allows or restricts access to a group of features or functions. For instance, an Extension COS may allow Call Forwarding features. In the System, both extensions and trunks use classes of service.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 31

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

The System supports the following COSs for trunks and extensions:

• COS - Trunk/Tie

• COS - Ext/Ext Restriction

• COS - Extension Feature

• COS - Trunk to Trunk Restriction

Class of Service - Trunk/Tie

Tie/Trunk COS allows or restricts access to various features. Each trunk is assigned to one of 16 trunk classes of service (00-15).

The following table shows the features that can be enabled/disabled for each trunk COS.

Table 4. Trunk COS

Number

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

8

9

10

11

12

Feature

Intercom Ringing Tone (trunk or intercom ring tone)

Dial Tone to Tie Lines (Enable/Disable)

Forced Recover on Fast-Busy Tone (Send fast busy or disconnect line)

DDI Dialled Number Conversion Table (DDI/CLI Table A or B)

Paging on DISA/Tie-Line Call (Allow/Restrict)

DISA Security Code Verification

Network Flash Forwarding (Version 3.5 and higher)

Network Flash Receive (Version 3.5 and higher)

Brokers Hold for Network Calls (Version 3.5 and higher)

Priority Message-Waiting Set/Cancel (Version 3.5 and higher)

Network-to-Network Transfer (Version 3.5 and higher)

Camp-On for Tie-Lines (Version 3.5 and higher)

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction

Ext/Ext Restriction COS allows or restricts calls placed to other extensions based upon the Extension

COS. Each Extension COS is programmed to either originate or not originate calls to another

Extension COS.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

32 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

Class of Service - Extension Feature

Extension COS allows or restricts access to certain extension features. (The extension features are described later in this manual.) Each extension is assigned to one of 16 classes of service (00-15).

The following table shows the features that can be enabled/disabled for each Extension COS.

28

29

30

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

Number

8

9

10

11

12

13

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

14

15

Table 5. Extension COS

Class of Service Features

Feature

Intercom Call Type (Tone/Voice)

Onhook Transfer at Ringback (Allow/Restrict)

Onhook Transfer at Talk (Allow/Restrict)

On-Hook Transfer at Camp-On (Allow/Restrict)

Exclusive Hold for Non-Appearing trunk (System/Exclusive)

Exclusive Hold on SLTs (System/Exclusive)

Brokers Hold on SLTs (3-Party Conference/Brokers)

Hookflash During Talk on SLTs (Allow/Restrict)

SSD Assignment (Allow/Restrict)

SSD Assignment to MCO Tenant Groups (Allow/Restrict)

SSD Dialling (Allow/Restrict)

Intercom Redialing (Allow/Restrict)

Direct Trunk Access (Allow/Restrict)

MCO Incoming Call Answer (Allow/Restrict)

Paging (Allow/Restrict)

Auto Repeat Dial (Allow/Restrict)

DND Set/Clear (Allow/Restrict)

DND Set/Clear (Other) (Allow/Restrict)

Call Forward/All Calls (Allow/Restrict)

Call Forward/No Answer (Allow/Restrict)

Call Forward-Busy (Allow/Restrict)

Call Forward (Other) (Allow/Restrict)

User Maintenance Log-in (Allow/Restrict)

Priority Message Waiting Send (VM) (Allow/Restrict)

Message Waiting Send (Allow/Restrict)

System Mode Switch (Allow/Restrict)

Busy Override Send (Allow/Restrict)

Manual Camp-On Send (Allow/Restrict)

Manual Camp-On Receive (Allow/Restrict)

Callback Request Send (Allow/Restrict)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 33

Chapter 3. System Features

61

62

63

64

65

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

51

52-54

55

56

47

48

49

50

57

58

59

60

Class of Service Features

Callback Request Receive (Allow/Restrict)

Trunk Queuing (Allow/Restrict)

Manual DND Override Send (Allow/Restrict)

Forced DND Override (Allow/Restrict)

8-Party Conference (Allow/Restrict)

Voice Call Send (Allow/Restrict)

Voice Call Receive (Allow/Restrict)

Dial Tone Stop (Allow/Restrict)

Dial Tone Pre-Pause Check (Check/No check)

Long Talk Alarm for Outgoing trunk Calls (Enable/Disable)

Recall Timer Apply (Recall to Extension/Recall to Attendant)

Forced ARS (Not Forced/Forced)

API Event Reporting (No/Yes)

Call Forward/Outside (Allow/Deny)

Onhook Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Allow/Deny)

Station Call Park Answer (Allow/Deny)

Station Call Park Transfer (Allow/Deny)

OHVA (Allow/Deny)

OHVA Answer (Allow/Deny)

Call-Waiting Answer at HOLD

On-Hook Transfer with Floating Hold

Not Used

Station Lockout (Own)

Station Lockout (Other)

Absence Message Set

UNA Pickup

Intercom Ring Tone at Trunk (Version 3.5 and higher)

BGM Access

CFD Setting For a PDN By Pressing the NPDN

Busy Override

Silent Monitor Initiate

Silent Monitor Receive

Recall Pickup

Section 700 - Operation

34 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction

Trunk to Trunk COS allows or restricts call transfers from one trunk to another trunk based on the originating and receiving trunk COS.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers

CPC-96, CPC-288, and CPC-576 Version 3.0

Prior to CPC Version 3.0, timers related to certain extension functions such as the Hold Recall Timer were only available on a system-wide basis. Beginning with CPC Version 3.0 these extension functions may continue to use the same system-wide timers or a newly added Station Timer Class settings. Up to eight Station Timer Classes may be specified. Then an extension may be assigned a

Station Timer Class.

The following table shows the extension timers that may be assigned on a class basis.

Table 6. Station Timer Class

Number

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

Station Timer

Hold Recall Timer (KTEL)

Hold Recall Timer (SLT)

Transfer Recall Timer (KTEL and SLT)

Hold/Transfer Recall Ringing Timer

Call Park Recall Timer

Call Forward No Answer Timer (Day 1)

Call Forward No Answer Timer (Day 2)

Call Forward No Answer Timer (Night)

Floating Hold Recall Timer

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 35

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

Data Security

Description

If you are using a line for data (modem connections, etc.), Data Security makes it possible to prevent interruptions. Data Security can be implemented for either all phone use or outside line use.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)

Description

The Daylight Saving Time feature allows you to program the 576 so that it automatically adjusts the system’s internal timeclock forward or back on specific days of the year. This time change is then reflected on the phone’s display (Key Telephone only).

Depending on the day of the year, the system will set the time according to the following:

Day of the year

Third Sunday in March

Last Sunday in October

System Action

System clock adds one hour to current time at 2 a.m.

System clock subtracts one hour from current time at 2 a.m.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• N/A

Considerations

• Daylight Saving Time can only be enabled or disabled in system programming. See Section 400:

Programming for more information.

Day/Night System Mode

Description

Day/Night System Mode enables you to switch the System between two Day modes and a Night mode. These modes determine incoming call handling, Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) call handling, and attendant group support.

36 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

While in a Night mode (generally used at night or any time when your office is closed), incoming calls can ring at selected extensions (e.g., a night watchman’s extension or an extension connected to an answering machine). Outbound calls can be restricted to certain phones. Calls can be directed to a night-time attendant group instead of the normal daytime attendant group.

The System provides one Night mode for night call handling. However, there are three night feature access codes (Night, Night 1, and Night 2). These three codes may be used to provide different twoway Voice Mail messages (i.e., Night may select one message, Night 1 may select a different message, and Night 2 may select a third message.)

Typically, the Day mode is used for normal call processing of outside calls, TRS (Call Barring) calls, and attendant calls. The second day mode (Day 2) may be used for alternative call handling such as during a lunch break, etc.

There are two ways to change day/night service modes:

• Manually

• Automatically

The following table lists the impact on TRS (Call Barring), Ringing, Attendant, and Built-in Voice

Mail in the various system modes:

Table 7.

System Mode Impact on TRS (Call Barring), Ringing, Attendant, and Built-in Voice Mail

SYSTEM

MODE

Day 1

Day 2

Night

Night 1

Night 2

TRS (Call Barring)

Day TRS Mode

Day TRS Mode

(Same for Day 1 and

Day 2)

Night TRS Mode

(Same for Night 1, and 2)

Night TRS Mode

(Same for Night 1, and 2)

Night TRS Mode

(Same for Night 1, and 2)

RING

Day 1 Ring Pattern

Day 2 Ring Pattern

Night Ring Pattern

(Same for Night 1, and 2)

Night Ring Pattern

(Same for Night 1, and 2)

Night Ring Pattern

(Same for Night 1, and 2)

ATTENDANT

Day 1 Attend. Group

Day 2 Attend. Group

Handling

Night Attend. Group

(Same for Night 1, and 2)

Night Attend. Group

(Same for Night 1, and 2)

Night Attend. Group

(Same for Night 1, and 2)

BUILT-IN

VOICE MAIL

Day 1 Message

Day 2 Message

Night Message

Night 1 Message

Night 2 Message

Manual Day/Night Mode

You can manually change the System mode to Day 1, Day 2, Night, Night 2, or Night 3 mode by either entering the correct dial code or by pressing the appropriately programmed FF key.

When using manual mode, the System may be configured to either use MCO tenant Day/Night modes or system-wide Day/Night mode.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 37

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To switch Day 1/Day 2/Night modes using Feature Access Codes (Versions prior to

3.0):

Switch Mode

Toggle Day 1,

Day 2 and Night

Modes

Procedure

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

Indication

Intercom dial tone

ON/OFF LED lights

2. Enter 760 (UK/HK) or 760# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. Press the ON/OFF key

Day 2 Mode

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

ON/OFF LED goes off

If changing to Night mode, Red LED lights

If changing to Day mode, Red LED goes off

Intercom dial tone

ON/OFF LED lights

2. Enter 761 (UK/HK) or 761# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) for the

Day 2 Feature code.

3. Press the ON/OFF key

Night 1 Mode

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

ON/OFF LED goes off

Green LED lights

Intercom dial tone

ON/OFF LED lights

2. Enter 762 (UK/HK) or 762# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)for the

Night 1 Feature code.

3. Press the ON/OFF key

Night 2 Mode

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

ON/OFF LED goes off

Red Night LED lights

Intercom dial tone

ON/OFF LED lights

2. Enter 763 (UK/HK) or 763# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) for the

Night 2 Feature code.

3. Press the ON/OFF key ON/OFF LED goes off

Red Night LED lights

38 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

To switch Day 1/Day 2/Night modes using Feature Access Codes (Version 3.0 and later):

Switch Mode

Toggle Day 1,

Day 2 and Night

Modes

Procedure

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

Indication

Intercom dial tone

ON/OFF LED lights

2. Enter 760 (UK/HK) or 760# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. Press the ON/OFF key

Day 2 Mode

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

ON/OFF LED goes off

If changing to Day 2 mode, Green LED lights

If changing to Night mode, Red LED lights

If changing to Day 1mode, LED goes off

Intercom dial tone

ON/OFF LED lights

2. Enter 761 (UK/HK) or 761# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) for the

Day 2 Feature code.

3. Press the ON/OFF key

Night 1 Mode

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

ON/OFF LED goes off

Green LED lights

Intercom dial tone

ON/OFF LED lights

2. Enter 762 (UK/HK) or 762# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) for the

Night 1 Feature code.

3. Press the ON/OFF key

Night 2 Mode

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

ON/OFF LED goes off

Red Night LED lights

Intercom dial tone

ON/OFF LED lights

2. Enter 763 (UK/HK) or 763# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia) for the

Night 2 Feature code.

3. Press the ON/OFF key ON/OFF LED goes off

Red Night LED lights

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Day and Night modes can be assigned to FF keys on a phone. You can switch between Day 1,

Day 2, Night, Night 1, and Night 2 modes simply by pressing the appropriate key. The FF key lights red when the System is in the assigned mode. Alternatively a Day/Night toggle mode key can be assigned. Pressing the key toggles between modes. When in Day mode, the FF key LED is not lit. When in Night mode, the LED lights red.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 39

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

• With CPC 3.0 and later - Day 1/Day 2/Night toggle mode key can be assigned. Pressing the key toggles between modes. When in Day 1 mode, the FF key LED is not lit. When in Day 2 mode, the LED lights green. When in Night mode, the LED lights red.

• Prior to CPC 3.0 - Day/Night toggle mode key can be assigned. Pressing the key toggles between modes. When in Day mode, the FF key LED is not lit. When in Night mode, the LED lights red.

Automatic Day/Night Mode

You can set the System to automatically enter a particular Day/Night mode determined by the time of day. Each day of the month can be assigned 1 of 3 automatic system mode patterns. Each of the patterns can be set to change modes up to 5 times per day.

Up to 20 special days can be programmed with up to 5 automatic mode changes for the day.

An Exception Day period is available for overriding the automatic mode for extended periods of time.

For instance, if an office is shut down for the week of July Fourth, the System can be programmed to not operate in the automatic mode for those days. The System will stay in the same mode for the period. The mode may be manually changed at any time.

For instance, the System can be set to automatically enter Day 1 mode at 8:00 a.m. on weekdays and enter Night mode at 5:00 p.m. on weekdays. All incoming calls, TRS (Call Barring) and attendant group handling would change accordingly. On Saturday and Sunday, the System would stay in Night mode.

The Automatic Day/Night modes may be set in User Maintenance. See “Set Mode Schedule” on page

91, “Set Special Day Mode” on page 100, “Set Exception Day Mode” on page 87, and “Set Day of

Week Mode” on page 85.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• You can only set Automatic Day/Night modes on a system-wide basis. If tenant groups require separate Day/Night modes, you must set these modes manually.

You can manually override Automatic Day/Night modes. (See “Manual Day/Night Mode” on page 37.)

Digital Pad

Description

Digital pad settings allow adjustment of call levels for different call types. There are 29 pad classes in the System. For pad class, a volume adjustment is assigned for a connection to any pad class assignment. The volume adjustment is between -30dB and +30 dB.

There are 8 extension pad classes and 16 trunk pad classes. In addition, there are pad classes for conference calls, page port, MFR, RAI Modem, and Conference Call Unit. One pad class is currently not used.

For instance, a call from an extension assigned to extension pad class 1 to a trunk assigned to trunk pad class 3 would received the volume adjustment assigned to this connection combination.

40 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Chapter 3. System Features

Direct Inward System Access

(All Versions)

Description

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) gives off-site users dial-in access to the System. You access

DISA from an outside location by entering a digit number assigned to a DISA trunk.

For security reasons, sixteen incoming DISA ID codes/Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) class can be assigned. If a code is assigned, it must be entered as soon as the DISA trunk answers.

Operation

To make a DISA call to an extension:

Action

1. From an outside location, enter the DISA trunk number.

2. If an incoming DISA code is assigned enter the DISA code

(up to 10 digits). Otherwise, proceed to step 3.

3. Dial the extension number.

DISA dial tone

Result

To make a DISA call to an outside number:

Action

1. From an outside location, enter the DISA trunk number.

2. If an incoming DISA code is assigned enter the DISA code

(up to 10 digits). Otherwise, proceed to step 3.

3. Enter the trunk group number (9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,

Indonesia, Malaysia], or 81-84)

4. Dial the phone number.

DISA dial tone

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Busy override cannot be used for a DISA line.

• DISA can be used to access extensions as well as outside numbers.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 41

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

• Paging cannot be accessed from a DISA line.

• While dialling an extension number, the * key may be entered to cancel dialling and return to dial tone. The # key may be entered to disconnect.

Distinctive Ringing

Description

Distinctive Ringing sets trunk calls to ring with a distinctive ring based on the trunk. This “ring” also identifies the call as an outside call instead of an inside call.

Beginning with CPC Version 3.0, calls to a key telephone or Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT) can also be set to Distinctive Ringing on an extension basis.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Doorphone

Description

The doorphone allows visitors to announce their presence from the office door, etc. When the button on the doorphone is pressed, one or more phones ring in the System. When answered, a two way conversation is made between the doorphone and the answering phone.

The answering party can operate a connected door opener (if equipped).

Operation

To answer a doorphone:

Action

1. Answer the doorphone. (Door box calls ring in on a dedicated FF key.)

2. Enter 3 while connected to the doorphone extension.

Result

Two way conversation possible

Door unlocks

Hardware Requirements

• The doorphone requires a Doorphone Adaptor, Doorphone, and Door Opener. Door openers are not sold by Panasonic; however, they can be purchased from an electronics dealer.

• Up to 2 Doorphones can be connected to a Doorphone Adaptor and utilize the same trunk.

• The Door Opener can be set to open for 15 seconds, 30 seconds, or one minute.

42 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

• While the Door Opener is functioning, a call from another Doorphone on the same Doorphone

Adaptor cannot be answered.

Considerations

• The trunk connected to the Doorphone Adaptor must be set to dial pulse (DP).

Doorphone Sensor

The sensor is a device that detects when a circuit is opened or closed. Sensors can be used to detect events such as the opening of windows or doors. When the sensor is tripped, a tone sounds at a designated extension. Sensors are not sold by Panasonic; however, they can be purchased separately from an electronics dealer.

Hardware Requirements

• The sensor is attached to the Doorphone Adaptor (VB-3473UK).

• Trunks connected to the Doorphone Adaptor signal the designated extension when the sensor is tripped.

Considerations

• The trunk connected to the sensor must be a dial-pulse (DP) trunk.

Extension Interface

The System supports a full array of extension devices including the following:

• Panasonic’s proprietary key telephones

• Standard analog devices

• Dial Pulse (DP) / Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Single Line Telephone (SLT)

• Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Basic Rate Interface (BRI) S-point devices

• ISDN-Primary Rate Interface (PRI) S-point devices

Digital Key Telephones

The System supports the complete line of Panasonic proprietary Digital Key Telephones. These models include:

• 12 key-Standard

U.K.

VB-D411UK or

VB-D411UKB

Others

VB-44220

• 12 key-Speakerphone

• 12 key-Display Speakerphone

VB-44221

VB-44223

• 12 key-Large Display Speakerphone

• 12 key-Soft key Display Speakerphone

VB-D411DSUK or

VB-D411DSUKB

VB-D411LDSUK or

VB-D411DSUKB

VB-D411DSVUK

VB-44225

VB-44224

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 43

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

• 24 key-Display

• 24 key-Display Speakerphone

U.K.

VB-D611DUK

VB-D611DSUK or

VB-D611DSUKB

VB-D331UK

VB-D631UK

Others

VB-44233

• EM24-24 key Expansion Module

• DSS-72 key DSS/BLF

VB-44310

VB-44320

UK/Indonesia/Malaysia:In addition to the above digital key telephone module, the System supports the complete of the ICX proprietary VB-3411/3611 series telephones and VB-3011 Digital SLT.

HK/Taiwan: The former ICX proprietary telephones are not available to connect to ICX systems without modification. Please consult your dealer.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• VB-44220 is not available in Hong Kong.

• VB-44221 is not available in Taiwan, Malaysia, and Indonesia.

Analog Device Capability

The System supports analog telephone devices. These devices include fax machines, answering machines, cordless telephones, computer modems as well as standard rotary and push button telephones. This provides full flexibility in configuring the System.

Hardware Requirements

• Analog devices must be connected to an analog port.

Considerations

• N/A

DP/DTMF SLTs

The System supports both DP (rotary dial) and DTMF (push button) analog extension types.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The CPC card provides 4 DTMF receivers. Traffic levels may require that one or more MFR

(DTMF) circuit cards be installed. Each MFR card provides 8 DTMF decoders.

ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface

The System supports ISDN-BRI terminal devices for connection as extensions. The BRI provides 2 B

(bearer) plus 1 D (data) channel support (2B +D; 144kbps or 192 kbps).

44 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface

UK/Malaysia/Indonesia: The System supports Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Primary

Rate Interface (PRI) terminal equipment with the ISDN/PRI S Point Interface (VB-44540UK).

The primary rate interface provides 30B (bearer) plus one D (data) channel support (30B +D;

1984kbps).

On the ICX, either 8 or 30 circuits may be enabled on the interface. Each enabled group of 8 circuits requires a slot position in the System. Fully used cards occupy four slot positions for the

ICX.

HK/Taiwan: The System supports ISDN-PRI terminal equipment with the ISDN/PRI S Point

Interface (VB-44540). The PRI provides 23 B (bearer) plus 1 D (data) channel support (23B + D;

1544 kbps).

On the ICX, either 8 or 30 circuits may be enabled on the interface. Each enabled group of 8 circuits requires a slot position in the System. Fully used cards occupy four slot positions for the

ICX.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Flexible Numbering Plan

Description

The System provides flexible numbering for feature access special numbers and extension numbers.

The dialling plan allows settings for digits dialled at dial tone, digits dialled at ringback tone, digits dialled at busy tone, two patterns of feature codes dialled at dial tone, two patterns of feature codes dialled at ringback tone, and two patterns of feature codes dialled at busy tone.

Feature access codes can be used when replacing another PBX system with an ICX or S-ICX system.

Rather than learning the new access codes, the System feature access codes can be changed to match the old system. As a result, telephone users are less confused by the change and the requirement for retraining is reduced. Two sets of feature access codes are available (one of the two must be assigned to the terminal).

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 45

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

Flexible Slot

Description

Each CCU in the ICX system contains 12 flexible (universal) slots. These slots can be used for trunk cards, extension cards, or certain option cards.

Some circuit cards such as the Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Primary Rate Interface

(PRI) card occupy more that one slot.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Hunting Groups

Description

Hunting allows calls to be automatically transferred among a preselected group of phones. If a phone is busy or there is no answer in a set amount of time, the call will hunt to the next phone in the hunt group.

A phone assigned to a hunt group is called a member. Up to 20 members can be assigned to a hunt group. Up to 12 hunt groups are available per CCU.

Several methods of station hunting are available. Some methods require use of a pilot number (a fictitious extension number) while others start by a direct call to a hunt group member.

The System supports the following hunting groups:

• Pilot Terminal Hunt Group

• Pilot Distributed Hunt Group

• Switch Back Hunt Group

• Circular Hunt Group

• Next Extension/Hunt Group

Pilot Terminal Hunt Group

Pilot Terminal Hunt Group directs calls to a pilot number. The System begins with the first member and hunts through the group for the first available member to receive the call. If no member is available (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call is queued for the first member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer to specify how long the

System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.

The main advantage of this type of hunting is that the same hunting order is taken for all calls. This is useful in presenting calls to selected members first.

Pilot Distributed Hunt Group

Pilot Distributed Hunt Group directs calls to a pilot number. The System reviews who received the last call and begins hunting with the next member. If the last member in the group is reached and no

46 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features member is available, the hunt continues with the first member and proceeds forward. After a complete search and no available member is found (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call is queued for the first member to become available. You can also set the

Queuing Timer and specify how the long the System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.

The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls are evenly distributed throughout the group.

Switch Back Hunt Group

Switch Back Hunt Group initiates hunting in a specified group for calls made to a member extension in the group. If the called member of the hunt group is busy, the System begins hunting forward to the end of the group. If no member is available, the system hunts backward from the called member. If no member is available (extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call is queued for the first member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer and specify how the long the System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.

The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls can be directed to start with a selected portion of the hunting group based on the directed number. However, all members are eventually searched.

Circular Hunt Group

Circular Hunt Group initiates hunting in a specified group for calls made to a member extension in the group. If the called member of the hunt group is busy, the System begins hunting forward to the end of the group and then moves forward from the first member of the group. If no member is available

(extension is busy or there is no answer for a specified amount of time), the call is queued for the first member to become available. You can also set the Queuing Timer and specify how the long the

System will search the initial hunt group before beginning to search the next hunt group or extension.

The main advantage of this type of hunting is that calls can be directed to start with a selected portion of the hunting group based on the directed number. However, all members are eventually searched.

Next Extension/Hunt Group

Next Extension/Hunt Group lets you specify which extension or hunt group to search after the

Queuing Timer expires. This hunt group can be set as any type of hunt group, an attendant group, or an extension (including virtual extensions).

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• If a member of the hunt group has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) or Call Forwarding - All set, that phone is temporarily removed from the hunt group.

• If a member of the hunt group has Call Forwarding - Busy set and the extension is busy, the call goes to the next phone in the hunt group.

• If all members are busy for the duration of the busy queuing timer, the call can be forwarded to another hunt group or another extension.

• A hunt group can contain both real extensions and virtual extensions. If virtual, several phones can be made to ring at the same time.

• The pilot number for a hunt group is flexible (i.e., any extension number can be designated as the pilot [not a real extension]).

• Hunt groups support the following call types:

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 47

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

• CLI (Called Line Identification) / Direct Dial Inward (DDI)

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

• Extension calls

• Private network attendant calls

• Call forward incoming

• Call forwarded to Attendant Hunt Group

• For Version 4.0 and higher, a queuing wait timer allows you to queue calls in a Hunt

Group for a fixed period of time. When the call has passed through the Hunt Group once, the timer is activated and the call is re-routed to the top of the group. The system continues to hunt for an available agent until the timer limit expires, and the call is diverted to another location.

Internal Hold Tone

Description

If a Music-on-Hold (MOH) sound source is unavailable, a periodic hold tone generated internally in

the System can be provided to a caller. For more information, see “Music-on-Hold” on page 49.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

MCO Tenant Group

Description

When the System is configured for tenant operation, MCO Tenant Group determines which trunk groups are used for incoming and outgoing calls.

Each MCO trunk group is assigned to an MCO tenant group for incoming calls and for outgoing calls.

By default, Trunk Group 1 is assigned to MCO Tenant Group 1, Trunk Group 2 is assigned to MCO

Tenant Group 2, etc. for both incoming and outgoing calls.

For outgoing calls, each tenant group has 5 auto-trunk selections available. By default the first autotrunk selection is seized by entering 9, the second by entering 81, etc.

The number of MCO tenant groups available depends on the number of ports in the system as follows:

• ICX:

• 96-port system: 1 to 12 MCO tenant groups

• 192-port system:1 to 24 MCO tenant groups

• 288-port system:1 to 36 MCO tenant groups

• 384-port system:1 to 48 MCO tenant groups

• 480-port system:1 to 60 MCO tenant groups

48 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

• 576-port system:1 to 72 MCO tenant groups

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• When you first assign a trunk to Trunk Tenant Group from the initial setting of (0), the system automatically assigns the trunks as a member of the same number MCO Trunk Group (FF5-2 and

FF5-3). For instance, if Trunk 10 is assigned as a member of Trunk Tenant Group 1, then Trunk

10 is automatically assigned as a member of MCO Outbound Trunk Group 1 and MCO Inbound

Trunk Group 1. These assignments can be manually changed if desired.

Memory Backup

Description

Data stored in the CPC card can be copied to another CPC card in the OP2 card slot for the first CCU.

This is particularly useful when performed after completion of initial system setup (as a recovery measure) or before major changes are made to system configuration. This backup CPC can then be used to immediately restore system operation.

This feature is a maintenance feature to be performed by the System certified dealer only.

Hardware Requirements

• A second CPC card that matches the type installed must be used to copy the memory.

Considerations

• N/A

Music-on-Hold

Description

The System can provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) to parties on hold (either trunk, extension, or network party). The MOH feature can also be used to play announcements or advertisements if desired.

Hardware Requirements

• The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 49

Chapter 3. System Features

Considerations

Section 700 - Operation

Important: A license may be required from the Society of Composers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit radio or recorded music through the MOH feature. Panasonic, its distributors, and affiliates assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment fail to obtain such a license.

Name Assignments

Description

Names may be assigned to the following:

• Extensions

• Trunks

• Direct Dial Inwards (DDIs)

• Personal Speed Dials (PSDs)

• Systems Speed Dials (SSDs)

Trunk names and DDI names must be assigned in dealer programming mode. Extension names and

Speed Dial names may be assigned from a display telephone.

This feature does not require the use of a DSS/72 console or entering the programming mode.

Extension Name Assignments

Extension names can be up to 10 characters in length. (Assignment of extension names must be allowed in the Extension COS.)

Operation

To set extension names using a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the * key.

4. Enter 2 for the Extension Name Assignment mode.

Result

Intercom dial tone

EXT NO.=>

EXT NAME

displays

5. Enter the extension number.

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Press the FL/R key to clear the existing data.

XXX

A B C D E F XXX

displays (where

XXX = extension number)

A B C D E F XXX

displays (where

XXX = extension number)

50 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

Action

8. Enter the extension name:

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

51.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 52.)

9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See “Example 1. Large-Display Phone” on page 51.

• See “Example 2. Small-Display Phone” on page 52.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

10. Repeat steps 7-8 as many times as necessary to enter the desired extension name.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

11. Press the HOLD key when finished.

12. To enter another extension name, press the CONF key and repeat steps 5-11.

Result

Next extension number displays

EXT NO.=>

EXT NAME displays

Example 1. Large-Display Phone

To enter D: a. Press the first soft key on the top left.

b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.

To enter o:

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 51

Chapter 3. System Features a. Press the third soft key from the top right.

b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.

Section 700 - Operation

Example 2. Small-Display Phone

Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press. (See step 7-8 above.) a b c d e f

A B C D E F g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x

G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X y z : & / sp

Y Z . , ’ -

To enter D: a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.

52 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.

Chapter 3. System Features a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.

b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 53

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Extension names can be up to 10 characters in length.

• The ability to make extension name assignments is allowed/restricted to anyone with a Class of

Service (COS) that allows access to User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User

Maintenance” of this document.)

Speed Dial Name Assignments

You can assign names to PSD numbers from a display telephone without entering the programming mode. If allowed in the Extension COS, you can also assign names to SSD numbers.

Operation

PSD Names:

To set PSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the * key.

4. Enter 0 for the PSD Name Assignment mode.

Result

5. Press the up or down arrow key to display the desired PSD bin number.

6. Enter the extension name:

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

51.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 52.)

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data

7. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 51.

• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 52.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

8. Repeat steps 6-7 as many times as necessary to enter the desired PSD name.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

9. Press the HOLD key when finished.

10. To enter another speed dial name repeat steps 5-9.

A B C D E F P80 displays (where P80 =

PSD bin 80)

A B C D E F PXX displays (where PXX

= desired PSD bin number)

Next PSD bin number displays

54 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

SSD Names:

To set SSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the * key.

4. Enter 1 for the SSD Name Assignment mode.

SSD NO.=>

Result

5. Enter the speed dial bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Press the FL/R key to clear the current data.

-SSDXXX

A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX

= specified SSD bin number)

A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX

= specified SSD bin number)

8. Enter the speed dial name:

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

51.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 52.)

9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 51.

• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 52.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the desired SSD name.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

11. Press the HOLD key when finished.

12. To enter another speed dial name, press the CONF key and repeat steps 5-11.

Next SSD bin number displays

SSD NO.=>

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• PSD names can contain a maximum of 7 characters. SSD names can contain a maximum of 16 characters.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 55

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

• The ability to make extension name assignments is allowed/restricted to anyone with a Class of

Service (COS) that allows access to User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User

Maintenance” of this document.)

Network Facilities

Description

The System supports networking facilities such as:

• Network Attendant Reversion (Version 3.5 and higher)

• Network Call Routing

• Network Call Transfer

• Network Centralized Attendant (Version 3.5 and higher)

• Network Centralized Voice Mail (Version 3.5 and higher)

• Networking Extension Calling

• Network Flash Transfer (Version 3.5 and higher)

• Network Hold (Version 3.5and higher)

• Network Paging

• Network Transfer Recall (Version 3.5 and higher)

• Tandem Calling

For more information on System Networking, see the System Networking Reference Manual.

Network Attendant Reversion

Version 3.5 and later

Network Attendant Reversion enables calls to revert to the attendant in the same CCU. Calls will not revert if the CCU receiving the call has no attendant. Network Attendant Reversion does not work with Network Hold.

Network Call Routing

Network Call Routing allows multiple systems that are interconnected in a network, to direct calls to a specific tie line based on the number dialled. The call does not leave the network.

Network Call Transfer

Network Call Transfer allows a call at an extension to be transferred to another extension in the network.

Network Centralized Attendant

Version 3.5 and later

Network Centralized Attendant allows callers from one node to dial the operator in another node by dialing 0.

56 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

Network Centralized Voice Mail

Version 3.5 and later

Network Centralized Voice Mail allows one primary attendant group in the network to handle network attendant calls.

Related Programming

• FF6-2-04: Route Table: Digit Modify Pattern No.

• FF6-2-05: Digit Modify Table - Add Ending Digits

• FF6-2-05-0005: Numbering Plan

• FF6-2-06: Authorization Code (UK Only)

• FF6-2-09-0001: Dialing Access Voice Mail System

• FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Priority Message - Waiting Send/Cancel)

• FF8-1-05: Call-Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail

• FF8-1-06: MSG Key ID Codes (USA only)

Network Extension Calling

Network Extension Calling allows you to reach an extension on another PBX. Based on the number you dial, the System network routes the call automatically.

Network Flash Transfer

Version 3.5 and later

When three or more systems are networked together with one ICX as the tandem, Network Flash

Transfer determines where a call is held when Network Hold is pressed.

Related Programming

• FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Network Flash Forwarding)

Network Hold

Version 3.5 and later

Network Hold allows the user to place a call on hold by pressing a programmed line key or MCO key.

When using Network Hold, you cannot establish a conference call between nodes, and only one party can place the call on hold.

Related Programming

• FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Broker’s Hold for Network Calls)

• FF1-1-01-0020: Network Flash Signal Timer

• FF1-2-02: FF Dial Codes: Plan A (Network Flash Send During Intercom Dial Tone)

• FF1-2-03: FF Dial Codes: Plan B (Network Flash Send During Intercom Dial Tone)

• FF4-0-BSSC-0: FF-Key Assignment (Network Flash During Talk on FF-key)

Network Paging

Network Paging allows users on one System to page on another System when the appropriate Class of

Service (COS) allows.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 57

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

Network Transfer Recall

Version 3.5 and later

Network Transfer Recall allows a call which has been transferred to another node to recall back to the transferring extension.

Tandem Connection

Tandem Connection allows calls that are received over the network tie lines to be automatically routed on to another PBX or out to the public network.

Hardware Requirements

• T1 (USA), E&M (HK) or AC-15 (UK) Card

Considerations

• N/A

Non-Blocking Architecture

Description

The System is totally non-blocking. All extension and outside lines are available for use at the same time.

Hardware Requirements

• The CPC-96 supports up to 96 ports. The CP-288 supports up to 288 ports and should be combined with time switch card TSW288. The CPC-576 supports up to 576 ports and should be combined with time switch card TSW576.

Considerations

• N/A

Power Failure Transfer

Description

Power Failure Transfer provides telephone service to a limited number of Single Line Telephones

(SLTs) during a power failure. The SLTs are connected to the trunk via a Power Failure Unit (PFU). In the event of a power failure, the power failure extensions have dial tone directly from the trunk.

(System features and restrictions do not apply.)

Hardware Requirements

• Power Failure Unit (VB-43703)

• An SLT that will be connected to the PFU.

58 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

Considerations

• Up to four SLTs can be connected to one PFU.

• For added protection against power outages, backup batteries can be installed in the System.

Backup batteries provide full telephone service and system features to all System extensions for a limited amount of time. With maximum traffic, the backup batteries last up to 30 minutes in the

ICX.

Power On Maintenance

Description

The System allows you to change most circuit cards, programming, and many other maintenance features while the System is powered on and operating. Very few operations require the System to be powered down or out of service. The System therefore continues to operate without interruption for most maintenance functions.

A limited number of items such as the replacement of some common control circuit cards requires the system to be powered down.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Programming Devices

Description

The dealer may program the System either by using:

• A digital key telephone equipped with display

• A PC-Based Customizing Tool

Telephone Programming

The System can be fully programmed from an extension telephone equipped with 12 FF keys and a display. While major system configuration changes may be more easily performed using a PC programmer, all programming is available via a telephone. This is especially useful for minor changes to the system configuration.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 59

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

PC-Based Customizing Tool

The System can be completely configured using the PC-Based Customizing Tool. This may be done either by directly connecting to the System or by remote connection using a modem.

The System database can be uploaded and downloaded for easy storage and retrieval.

The PC-Based Customizing Tool connects to the System through the RS232C maintenance port.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

QSIG ISDN Lines

Version 3.5 and later

Description

QSIG is a digital signaling protocol for private-network phone systems comprised of ISDN lines.

Internationally, it is also called Private Signaling System No. 1 (PSS1).

QSIG, developed in the late 1980’s and still in the process of global standardization, provides the ability to efficiently interconnect the remote ISDN PBX sites of large organization. In addition to normal phone service, QSIG also supports advanced applications such as interconnection of voice/ fax/DP servers, broadband private networks, etc. In other words with QSIG “it’s not just a phone line anymore.”

For more information on QSIG, see Section 570: QSIG Reference.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF2-1: QSIG ISDN Lines

Considerations

• N/A

Ringing Modes

Description

The System supports multiple types of trunk ringing including the following:

• Day 1/Day 2/Night Ringing

• Day 1/Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing

• DDI Day/Night Ringing

60 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

• DDI Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing

• Busy Lamp Field Immediate Ringing

• Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing

• Slide Ringing

• Alarm Ringing

Day 1/ Day 2/Night Ringing

When the System is in Day 1 mode, calls can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt group per the Day 1 ringing assignments.

When the System is in Day 2 mode, calls can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt group per the Day 2 ringing assignments.

When the system is in Night mode, call can be directed to ring at one or more extensions or at a hunt group per the Night ringing assignments.

Inbound calls can be directed to desired normal daytime locations by setting the system into a Day mode. By having a second day mode (Day 2) alternative call handling is available during day operation. For instance, during lunch, calls can be directed to an alternative position.

Calls can be directed specific night locations when the system is set to Night mode.

For more information on Day Ringing, see “Day/Night System Mode” on page 36.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Day 1/ Day 2/Night Delayed Ringing

Delayed Ringing causes an incoming outside call that is unanswered at a primary extension within a certain period of time, to ring at a designated extension or extensions. Delayed ringing destinations can be set for Day 1, Day 2 and Night modes. trunk Delayed Ringing is also available for hunt group pilot numbers.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

DDI (DID) Day/Night Ringing

(Note: Analog DID is not available in the UK, TX or EX model).

Incoming DDI calls can be set to ring at day destinations when the system is in day mode and ring at night destinations when the system is in night mode.

Hardware Requirements

• DDI (DID) Trunk Card

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 61

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

• N/A

DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing

DDI Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing causes an incoming DDI call to a busy primary extension to ring at a designated extension or extensions. DDI Busy/Delayed Ringing also causes an incoming

DDI call that is unanswered at a primary extension within a certain period of time, to ring at a designated extension or extensions. Separate ring destinations are available for day and night modes.

DDI Busy/Delayed Ringing is also available for hunt group pilot numbers. However, when the

Queuing Timer expires, the call leaves the hunt group and is forwarded to the DDI Busy/Delayed

Ringing destination.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Call Forwarding takes priority over DDI Busy/Delayed Ringing

• If the call is part of a hunt group and the Queuing Timer expires, the call is forwarded to the DDI

Busy/Delay Ringing destination. (See “DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing” on page

62.)

Busy Lamp Field Ringing

Extensions that have Direct Station Select (DSS)/BLF FF keys assigned may be set to ring on those keys.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• ISDN phones may not set BLF ringing.

For more information on BLF ringing, see “Line Appearances” on page 174.

Busy Lamp Field Delayed Ringing

Extensions that have Direct Station Select (DSS)/BLF FF keys assigned may be set to delay ring on those keys.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• ISDN phones may not set BLF ringing.

For more information on BLF ringing, see “Line Appearances” on page 174.

Slide Ringing

Similar to Delayed Ringing, Slide Ringing allows an alternate position to answer calls. If a call is not answered within a slide ringing time period, the call can be set to ring at another phone with that trunk key.

62 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

One possible use for Slide Ringing is in an office with a common secretary. A non-ringing FF key can be assigned for each trunk used by the group. If a call is not answered within the slide ringing timer, the call will ring the common secretary.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Alarm Ringing

Alarm Ringing allows the incoming ringing tone to be changed if the call is not answered in a predetermined time. This can be very useful in alerting others to pick up unanswered calls.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• If slide ringing is enabled, it will override alarm ringing.

Station Message Detail Recording (Call Logging)

Description

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging) provides detailed call records of outgoing calls. Call Logging records can be output to a printer or an external call accounting system.

Various types of information are reported on the Call Logging record and each type of information

occupies a set position in the Call Logging format (See Figure 1 on page 64.) One type of information

is the “condition code” which occupies the first position in the output format. This code specifies what type of call was made or received (e.g., DISA Incoming call [S] or Closed Numbering call [W]).

However, condition codes are prioritized, and the type of call determines what code is displayed.

The following tables shows the priority of condition codes for outgoing calls and incoming calls.

Table 8. Priority of outgoing call condition codes

Priority

Highest

2nd

3rd

4th

Lowest

Condition

Code

T or H

F

W

Description

T = Outgoing Transfer Call

H = Outgoing Hold Call

F = Call Forward Outside Call

W = Closed Numbering

L

O

Note: In the case of an MCO outgoing call seizing the private line, the condition code 0 is displayed.

L = LCR Outgoing Call

O = Outgoing Call

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 63

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

For example, an outgoing call is an LRS Outgoing call (L) but it is also a transferred call. The Call

Logging data condition code will be T to indicate that the call was an Outgoing Transfer. (A transferred call’s condition code takes precedence over the type of call - LRS Outgoing call [L].)

Table 9. Priority of incoming call condition codes

Priority

Highest

2nd

Lowest

Condition

Code

Description

h or t h = Incoming Hold t = Incoming Transfer

D, N, or S D = DDI Incoming Call

N = Network Incoming Call

S = DISA Incoming Call

I or A I = Incoming Call

A = Abandoned Call

For example, an incoming call is a DDI Incoming call (D), but it is also a transferred call. The Call

Logging data condition code will be t to indicate that the call was an Incoming Transfer call. (A transferred call’s condition code takes precedence over the type of call - DDI Incoming call [D].)

Figure 1. Output data formatt

Format #1

T MM/DD HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS NNNN TTTT dddddddddddddddddddddddd aaaaaaaaaa vvvvv

H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Format #2

T MM/DD HH:MM:SS HH:MM:SS NNNN TTTT dddddddddddddddddddddddd aaaaaaaaaa vvvv

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 dddddddddddddddd cccccccc MM:SS

H

9

10

11

1 Condition Code: (I: Incoming call / D: DDI incoming call / h: Hold incoming call / N: Network incoming call / S:DISA incoming call / t: Transfer incoming call / A: Abandoned Call / O: Outgoing call [Non LCR] / F: Call forward outside call / H: Hold outgoing call / L: LCR outgoing call / T:

Transfer outgoing call / W: Closed Numbering)

2 Call Start Time (MM=01 to 12 / DD=01 to 31 / HH=00 to 23 / MM=00 to 59 / SS=00 to 59)

3

Call Duration Time (HH=00 to 23 / MM=00 to 59 / SS=00 to 59)

4 Trunk User No. (Extension line No.: 0 to 9999 / trunk No.: C001 to C576)

5

Trunk No. (Trunk No.: 001 to 576 / When trunk is disconnected while the call is on hold: *001 to

*576)

64 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

6

Dialled No. (24 digits max. including 0-9, *, # Cannot display Flash or Pause. If a number is hidden,

* will appear instead of digits. * will stay with the call even if the call is transferred. For Format 2, an

I Proceeds the digits if it is an incoming call.)

7

Accounting Code (10 digits max.)/Verified Account Code (Verified Account Code table number

V001 to V500)

8

DISA Security Code ID (DISA ID code table number D001-D016)

9

Caller Data (Format #2 only)

10

ISDN Charge Data (Format #2 only - originator number applies to ISDN only) - Not Used (Format #2 only) Future Use

11

Incoming Ringing Time (Format #2 only) (MM=00 to 99 / SS=00 to 59)

H

Carriage Return Line Feed

Hardware Requirements

• A printer or external call accounting system is required to receive Call Logging data.

Considerations

• A call must be answered to generate Call Logging data (e.g., answered by Voicemail, call pickup, etc.)

• You can specify which type of Call Logging data format is sent (i.e., either Format 1 or 2).

System Speed Dial TRS (Call Barring) Override

Description

System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers may be used to outdial calls from extensions that otherwise have outgoing call restrictions (i.e., Toll Restriction Service [TRS] Call Barring).

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Toll Restriction Service (Call Barring)

Description

Toll Restriction Service (TRS) - Call Barring allows access levels, including the prohibition of long distance calls or after-hours calls, to be assigned to specific extensions or trunks. This minimizes non-

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 65

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation business related calls and reduces phone bills by only allowing long distance calls over designated lines.

TRS (Call Barring) can be used in conjunction with Automatic Route Selection (ARS).

• TRS (Call Barring ) classes are set on an extension and trunk basis. Up to 50 TRS (Call

Barring) classes can be assigned.

• Each TRS (Call Barring) class is then assigned to a TRS level. This level is used as the basis for allowing or restricting calls.

• There are 10 TRS (Call Barring ) levels available: 0 denies all calls, 1-8 may be partially restrictive per assignments, and 9 allows all calls.

• TRS (Call Barring) can restrict the number of digits dialled (1 to 20 digits limit or no limit).

• TRS (Call Barring) can restrict the use of System Speed Dials (SSDs) for out dealing on a

TRS (Call Barring) class basis; either no system speed dials or limit the range of SSDs.

• TRS (Call Barring) can restrict the use of the star (*) or pound (#) digits on a TRS (Call

Barring) class basis.

The following calling restrictions are also available:

• Forced ARS Restriction (The ARS feature controls outside calls.)

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The dialling restrictions included in this feature help prevent unauthorized outgoing calls. It is possible; however, to program your System to allow SSD to override TRS (Call Barring).

Trunk Access Groups

Description

Trunks can be placed in trunk groups. When a trunk group is accessed, the System automatically selects an open trunk from the group.

Operation

To access a trunk group:

Action

1. Enter the Trunk Access Code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

2. Dial the phone number.

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

66 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

Considerations

• Trunks can only appear in one trunk group.

• If Automatic Call Routing is enabled, the MCO access code (default = 9 [UK/HK] and 0

[Taiwan/Malaysia/Indonesia]) automatically accesses the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) features.

Trunk Interface

Description

The System supports several types of trunk Interfaces including the following:

• Direct Dial Inward (DDI)

• Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) - Basic Rate Interface (BRI)

• ISDN - Primary Rate Interface (PRI)

• Loop Start

Each trunk type supports various features such as Delayed Ringing, Night Ringing, etc.

Trunk Interface - DDI (Not Available on UK, TX or EX Model)

The DDI feature allows an extension to have a dedicated direct number. The dedicated number allows calls to be made directly to the extension, without the caller going through the attendant.

The DDI number may have from 1 to 4 digits (typically 4).

Each DDI Trunk Interface card (VB-44520) supports up to 8 DDI trunks.

Hardware Requirements

• The -48V power supply is required.

Considerations

• The DDI Trunk card supports 1 to 4-digit dial-pulse (10 pps) or Dual Tone Multifrequency

(DTMF) signalling.

• DDI numbers must be between 0 and 9999.

Trunk Interface - ISDN BRI

The System supports ISDN BRI with the VB-44530 ISDN BRI interface unit. The VB-44530 is a T-

Point ISDN-BRI that supports 2 B (bearer) channels and 1 D (data) channel (2B + D; 144kbps or

192kbps). This unit connects to an ISDN Data Service Unit (DSU). Point-to-point and point-to-multi operations are selectable.

The ISDN-BRI supports enblock setting and enblock setting at the sub-address.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• A DSU is required (not available from Panasonic). Normally the DSU is supplied by the telephone service provider.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 67

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

Trunk Interface - ISDN-PRI

The System supports ISDN PRI with the VB-44540 ISDN PRI Interface unit. The VB-44540 is a T/S-

Point ISDN PRI that supports 30B (for UK) or 23B (for HK) (bearer) channels and 1 D (data) channel

(30B + D; 2M) (23B + D; 1.5M). This unit connects to an ISDN DSU.

Up to 3 units may be installed in a CCU if you use full channel (30B + D)/(23B + D or 24B). A maximum of 18 units may be utilised in a fully equipped system. When all 30 or 23 channels on a unit are utilised in one card, four or three slot positions are required.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Trunk Interface - Loop Start

The VB-44510UK Loop Start interface unit supplies 8 loop start analog exchange line circuits. In addition, the VB-44510UK Loop Start interface unit may alternatively be used to connect to loop start exchange lines.

Hardware Requirements

• VB-44510UK Loop Start Card

Considerations

• N/A

Trunk Ringing Types

Description

Several types of trunk ringing are available for the System including the following:

• Direct Dial Inward (DDI) Ringing

• Direct Line (DL) Ringing

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ringing

• Multiple Ringing

These ringing types may be used in any combination in the System.

DDI Ringing

DDI Ringing allows calls on a common trunk to be directed to ring to a specific extension or group of extensions, etc. based upon the final digits dialled. These final digits are received from the DDI trunk and compared to a DDI Table that determines where the calls should ring. Depending on the assignments in the DDI Table, names or trunk numbers are displayed. (Names can be up to 10 digits long.)

DDI Ringing can be very useful by sending calls directly to a specific extension, hunt group, etc. based upon the number dialled. Since a relatively small number of trunks handle the DDI calls, this can be more cost efficient than DL trunks or attendant group answering and transfer. (DDI may send a

68 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features call to a group using the Virtual Extension feature.) DDI Busy/Delayed Ringing is also available with

DDI Ringing. (See “DDI (DID) Day/Night Busy/Delayed Ringing” on page 62.)

For more information on DDI trunk Trunk Interface, see “Trunk Interface - DDI (Not Available on

UK, TX or EX Model)” on page 67.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Caller ID takes priority over the DDI name assignment.

• Only one of the two DDI tables may have name assignments.

• If the DDI/DL destination is a Directory Number (DN), the call goes to an extension that has a destination key even if the Primary Directory Number extension is busy or does not answer.

• If the DDI/DL destination is an UNA extension, the UNA will ring depending on DDI number tenant group/ DL incoming trunk tenant group.

Direct Line Ringing

DL Ringing allows calls on a specific trunk to be directed to ring a specific extension, System Speed

Dial (SSD) number (for redirecting calls out), and hunting group.

This can be very useful when a trunk is dedicated to a specific person or purpose. However, this can be a more expensive use of the line since it has a more limited use.

Prior to Version 4.0, it was impossible to distinguish between Private Line incoming calls and

Directory Number incoming calls. Version 4.0 and higher allows the person receiving the call to easily distinguish between these types of incoming calls.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• If the DDI/DL destination is a Directory Number (DN), the call goes to an extension that has a destination key even if the Primary Directory Number extension is busy or does not answer.

• If the DDI/DL destination is an UNA extension, the UNA will ring depending on DDI number tenant group/ DL incoming trunk tenant group.

Direct Inward System Access Ringing

DISA Ringing (which is related to the DISA feature) allows a trunk specified as a DISA trunk to ring and give off-site users dial-in access to the System. Once the DISA trunk is accessed, the user receives dial tone and may dial an extension.

For more information on DISA, see “Direct Inward System Access” on page 41.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 69

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement

Version 4.0 and higher

Prior to Version 4.0, a DIL call that was not answered by the Immediate Ringing extension was simultaneously passed to all other extensions in the MCO if Delayed Ringing was set. Beginning with

Version 4.0, an incoming DIL call that is not answered can be passed to a single Delayed Ring destination or to all extensions with an MCO key that includes the incoming exchange line. If the

Delayed Ringing extension is not answered, the call is forwarded the extension’s preprogrammed location (e.g., Voice Mail, Call Forwarding, etc.) For example:

DIL Immediate

(DIL Destination = 300)

Both Versions

DIL Delayed

(DIL Delayed Destination = 301)

Version 3.6

Version 4.0

FF2-0-BSSC-031 (DIL Dest. = 300)

1. Call rings on Ext. 300 only

FF2-0-BSSC-0441 (DIL Dest. = 300)

1. Call rings on Ext. 300

2. Call rolls over to Ext. 301, 302 and

303 simultaneously because they have an MCO key that includes the exchange line.

FF2-0-BSSC-041 (DIL Dest. = 300)

1. Call rings on Ext. 300

2. System can be programmed to ring

Ext. 301 only, or to ring all three extensions.

Note:

The program settings in the previous figure can also be used for the following Delayed

Ringing extension destinations:

- Speed Dial

- Hunt Group Number

- Attendant Group Number

- ERA Number

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF2-0-BSSC-03 (Ring Assignment)

• FF2-0-BSSC-04 (Delayed Ring Assignment)

• FF1-0-02-0027 (DIL Delayed Ringing Pattern)

Considerations

• N/A

70 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

Multiple Ringing

Description

Multiple Ringing allows trunk calls into the System to be directed to ring multiple extensions in the

System. This can be very useful when anyone in a group may answer a call. This can also be very useful at night when only a selected number of people are available to handle calls.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Virtual Port

Description

Virtual ports are not physical ports in the System. They are phantom or simulated ports used in the

System to support:

• Virtual extension ringing

• Virtual floating hold

Up to 96 virtual ports may be assigned per CCU.

Virtual Port used for Virtual Extension

You can assign an actual extension number to a virtual port. You can then assign the extension number as any actual extension (incoming call settings and types, Station Class of Service (COS), tenant group, pickup group, etc.). You can also assign the virtual port to an FF key on one or more telephones and set to ring. Any call directed to the virtual port extension number will ring the assigned telephone(s).

Virtual extensions provide a mechanism for ringing multiple phones simultaneously. For instance, a

Direct Inward Dialling (DDI) entry can only be set to ring to one extension number. However, if the

DDI is set to ring a virtual extension and the virtual extension is assigned to ring keys on multiple extensions, the DDI will ring the multiple extensions.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Virtual Port used for Floating Hold

You can assign a virtual port that is not assigned an extension number to be used for floating hold. The virtual port is assigned to an FF key. Calls can then be placed on hold on the virtual port FF key. Any extension that is assigned the same virtual port FF key can then pick up the held call.

This can be used like a system park feature.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 71

Chapter 3. System Features

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Section 700 - Operation

Voice Mail Integration (Third Party)

Description

The System supports third party Voice Mail systems with features such as:

• Answer Supervision for Voice Mail

• Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail

• CLI/DDI ID Code for Voice Mail

• High Priority Message Waiting

• Message Key ID Code

Answer Supervision for Voice Mail

Description

This feature allows the System to send an answer signal to third-party Voice Mail systems.

Without this feature a third-party Voice Mail cannot receive a signal indicating that a System extension has answered. In other words, to determine that the extension has answered, the Voice Mail system would have to wait until the extension stops receiving ringback tone. As a result, waiting for the ringback to stop often delays connection times for calls from Voice Mail to extensions. By sending an answer signal, this feature provides quicker response time between the ICX and the Voice Mail system.

Hardware Requirements

• AEC Port

Considerations

• The digits used for the answer signal code are determined by the requirements of the Voice Mail system.

• The answer code may be up to 4 characters and consist of the characters 0 - 9, *, #, and pause.

• If the called extension does not answer and is forwarded to Voice Mail, the System sends a Call

Forward ID code back to the Voice Mail system.

• During transmission of the answer signal code, other DTMF digits and functions from the ICX or

S-ICX extension are ignored.

• The Voice Mail port must be assigned as a Voice Mail port connection.

• The DTMF pattern is set as pattern 2.

Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail

Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail allows you to call forward to a third-party Voice Mail system.

The ID Code sends the digits that are required by the Voice Mail to identify the System extension.

72 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

Operation

To set a Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail:

Action

1. Go offhook or press ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the Call Forward ID Code (default = 715 [UK/HK or

715# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the ID code required by voice mail (see your voice mail manual). Usually this is the extension number.

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Go onhook or press ON/OFF key.

Result

Enter V.M. ID displays

Stored V.M. ID displays

To clear the ID Code:

Action

1. Go offhook or press ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the Call Forward ID Code (default = 715 [UK/HK or

715# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Press the HOLD key.

4. Go onhook or press ON/OFF key.

Result

Enter V.M. ID displays

Cleared V.M. ID displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code

CLI/DDI calls may be sent directly to voice mail through the used of the DDI Voice Mail ID Code. A prefix and suffix may be specified to be sent to the voice mail as well as a chosen number of DDI digits.

Either no digits (default), the last two digits of the DDI, the last three digits of the DDI or the entire

DDI number may be sent.

The prefix may be up to eight digits including 0-9, *, # and pause (REDIAL).

The suffix may be up to eight digits including 0-9, *, # and pause (REDIAL).

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Each pause is a fixed 1 second delay.

• If you do not assign a Voice Mail ID Code, the DDI digits will be sent to voice mail.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 73

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

• Only one Voice Mail ID Code is available for the system.

Disconnect Signal

Beginning with CPC Version 3.0, either busy tone or silence can be sent to a third-party voice mail system when the caller hangs up.

High Priority Message Waiting

Message waiting displays and LEDs may be utilized by the Voice Mail system to indicate that a Voice

Mail message has been left in your mail box. When you retrieve the message, the message waiting indications are cleared.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• For more information on setting and retrieving message waiting, see the telephone operation sections that follow in this document.

Message Key ID Code

On a large-display phone you can use a Message key (labelled MSG) to either retrieve Voice Mail messages or respond to telephone messages. When responding to Voice Mail messages from a 3rd party Voice Mail system, the Message key needs to have an ID code set to identify the caller to the

Voice Mail system. You can also use the Message key to program a Voice Mail password.

You must program the Message key using the User Maintenance feature “Set Message Key ID Code” on page 90.

Operation

To retrieve a message at Voice Mail:

Action

1. Press the MSG key.

2. Follow the Voice Mail instructions for retrieving messages.

3. When finished retrieving messages, replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Voice mail instructions

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

74 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 3. System Features

Voice Mail Transfer Key

Description

The Voice Mail Transfer (VM/TRF) key allows you to transfer calls to voice mailboxes without waiting for voice mail to answer. You can assign a Voice Mail Transfer key from a phone or through system programming.

Two Voice Mail Transfer keys are available. VM Transfer Key 1 will transfer to a voice mail extension number. Voice Mail Transfer Key 2 will transfer to the voice mail pilot number.

Prior to Version 5.0, the VM/TRF key could not be used to transfer a call into Voice Mail on another networked ICX or S-ICX system. Beginning with Version 5.0, the user can press the VM/TRF key to send a call across a node to another networked ICX or S-ICX system.

Operation

To assign a Voice Mail Transfer key from a phone:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the FF key to be assigned as the Voice Mail Transfer key.

4. Press REDIAL and 74nnnn (VM Transfer Key 1) where nnnn is the voice mail extension number or

Press REDIAL and 75nnnn (VM Transfer Key 2) where nnnn is the voice mail extension number

8. Press the HOLD key.

9. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To use a Voice Mail Transfer key:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key to answer the incoming call.

2. Press the VM/TRF (1 or 2) key .

3. Press the DSS/BLF key, dial an extension number or select the extension from the extension directory on the large display telephone.

4. Replace the handset or press the RELEASE, ON/OFF, or

PROG key.

Result

Connected to caller

System places caller on hold

Once a call is sent to the voice mail, after the voice mail answers, the system sends the VM Transfer

ID 1 or 2 + the extension number (BLF/DSS, Directory or dialled number).

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 75

Chapter 3. System Features Section 700 - Operation

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The VM/TRF key can be assigned to any key phone, DSS/72 or EM/24. The VM/TRF key cannot be assigned to a one-touch key.

• The VM/TRF key can be used to transfer intercom as well as trunk calls to a voice mailbox.

• The Voice Mail Transfer ID codes are assigned in the Maintenance Programming section. Up to ten digits can be stored.

• The system responds to key operations during the transfer in the following ways:

• Pressing the FL/R key cancels the VM/TRF and returns intercom dial tone to the user.

When the VM/TRF is cancelled, the incoming call is still connected but is on hold.

• If a valid key (trunk key or second DSS key, for example) is pressed, the VM/TRF is cancelled and the operation invoked by the key is performed.

• If an invalid key (REDIAL, for example) is pressed, the VM/TRF is cancelled, and the user receives busy tone.

• Once VM/TRF is pressed, the user can dial up to 10 digits before completing the transfer.

• If a user begins to perform the voice mail transfer and the extension cannot hold a call (one call is already on non-appearance hold, for example), the system will keep the call in the talk state and will not allow the voice mail transfer to be initiated.

• If the VM/TRF key stores a number other than a voice mail extension number, the system does not send DSS/BLF information or the extension number that is dialled after pressing VM/TRF.

76 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Chapter 4. User Maintenance

This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the following System maintenance topics and features:

Topic

Introduction

About User Programming

Set Absence Messages

Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension

Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail

Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension

Set Caller ID Logging Extensions

Set Day of Week Mode

Set Exception Day Mode

Set Extension Names

Set Message Key ID Code

Set Mode Schedule

Set Personal Speed Dial Names

Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers

Set Send Text Messages

Set Special Day Mode

Set System Date/Time/Day

Set System Speed Dial Index

Set System Speed Dial Names

Set System Speed Dial Numbers

Set Text Message Replies

Set Verified Account Codes

Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes

Page

91

93

98

99

85

87

89

90

81

82

83

84

77

79

80

111

112

113

115

100

107

108

109

Introduction

User Maintenance provides several items that can be adjusted by the end user of the telephone system.

The telephone system dealer is not required to make these changes. These items include settings for:

• Absence Messages

• CID Logging Ext

• Call Forward ID Code

• Date and Time - including date, time, and day of week

• Extension name

• Message Key ID Code

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 77

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

• Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Assignment - including PSD number and name

• Send Text Messages

• System mode. You can set the System to handle incoming calls, outbound call routing, and built-in voice mail call messages differently depending upon whether the system is in Day 1 mode, Day 2 mode, or Night mode. With User Maintenance, you can program the System for mode schedule, mode schedule for special day, mode schedule for exception days, and day of the month patterns.

• System Speed Dial (SSD) Assignment - including SSD number and name

• Text Message Replies

• TRF of CFID

• Verified Account Code

• Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Code

78 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

About User Programming

User Maintenance requires a Digital Display Key Telephone assigned to a Class of Service (COS) that allows User Maintenance.

The procedures in the following sections describe the basic steps used for modifying parameters.

However, there are many alternative ways to view and modify the parameters using special keys and procedures. Some of the more advanced keys include:

FF2

FF3

FF4

FF5

FF6

FF7

FF8

FF9

FF10

REDIAL

FL/R

(At menu level) clears an entry

(At data entry) retrieves the last entry setting

(At menu level) ignored

(At data entry) clears setting

ON/OFF

HOLD

Begins programming log-in or exits programming

(At menu level) moves to date and time

PROG

PREV

(At data entry) saves the displayed setting and moves to the next setting

Moves to the 81 User Maintenance Menu

CONF

MEMORY

Moves to the first data setting

Backs out of the address menu levels

MENU Ignored

(At menu level) moves to the previous screen

(At data entry) ignored

NEXT

(At menu level) moves to the next screen

(At data entry) ignored

VOLUME (down) Scrolls through the same address level (ascending)

VOLUME (up) Scrolls through the same address level (descending)

FF1

PSD Assignment menu

SSD Assignment menu

Extension Name menu

Verified ID Code menu

Call Forward ID Code menu

Message Key ID Code menu

System Mode menu

Walking /Station Lock TRS (Call Barring)

TRF of CWRD

CID Logging Ext.

Note:

Once in a data entry level, you must either enter an acceptable value or restore the previous value before proceeding. For instance, if you change an entry to an unacceptable value and then press

FF1 to move to the PSD Assignment menu, you will not be able to proceed. You must first enter an acceptable value.

Operation

To enter User Maintenance mode:

Action

1. At a telephone with a COS that allows user login, press the

ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the * key twice (* *).

4. Press the CONF key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 79

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

Note:

Your extension’s COS must be properly set to allow User Maintenance access. Also, only one user may enter User Maintenance or System Programming at a time.

Set Absence Messages

Description

This menu item specifies absences messages.

Operation

To set Absence Messages using either a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 12.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Enter the Message number (0-9).

6. Press the HOLD key.

8112-

Absence Message displays

Enter Msg # displays

A B C D E F X

displays (where X = Absence Message number)

7. Enter the Absence Message (up to 15 characters):

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

95.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.

8. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.

• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

9. Repeat steps 7-8 as many times as necessary to enter the desired Absence Message.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

10. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

Next message number displays

80 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Action Result

11. To set additional Absence Messages, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired

Absence Message.

Desired Absence Message displays

12. Repeat steps 7-11 until all Absence Messages are entered.

13. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.

14. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

Enter Msg # displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension

Description

You can assign a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension for each extension. This is typically used for forwarding calls to voice mail.

Operation

To set a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension using either a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 09.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8109-

TRF of CFWD displays

4. Enter 0.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Dial the extension number.

7. Press the HOLD key.

8. Enter the destination extension.

9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

CFWD-Busy EXT # displays

Enter CODE displays

Next extension number displays

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 81

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

Action

10. To set Call Forward Busy destinations for additional extensions, press the volume up and down key or press the

HOLD key to move to the desired Extension.

11. Repeat steps 9-11 until all extension are entered.

12. Press the

MEMORY

key to exit the entry mode.

13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail

Description

(For a description of Call Forward ID codes for Voice Mail, see “Call Forward ID Code for Voice

Mail” on page 72.)

Voice Mail Call-Forward ID codes are used by voice mail systems to identify the correct mail box for storing messages. The actual entry needed will vary by voice mail systems and configuration. Often the entry is the extension number.

Operation

To set the Call Forward ID code:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 05.

3. Press the HOLD key.

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Dial the extension number.

6. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8105-

C.FWD ID Code displays

CF ID-EXT Number displays

CF-ID EXT XXX displays (where

XXX = extension number)

82 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Action

7. Enter the Call Forward ID code.

Notes: The ID code may contain up to 16 digits and contain

0, 1-9, *, #, pause (REDIAL key).

To clear an entry or any existing data, press the

FL/R

key.

8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

9. To set additional Call Forward ID codes, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired extension.

10. Repeat steps 7-9 until all Call Forward ID codes are set.

11. Press the

MEMORY

key to exit the entry mode.

12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Next extension number displays

Desired extension displays

CF ID-EXT Number displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension

Description

You can assign a Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension for each extension. This is typically used for forwarding calls to voice mail.

Operation

To set a Call Forward Busy Destination Extension using either a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 09.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8109-

TRF of CFWD displays

4. Enter 1.

5. Press the HOLD key.

CFWD-NoANS Ext displays

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 83

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

Action

6. Dial the extension number.

7. Press the HOLD key.

8. Enter the destination extension.

9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

10. To set Call Forward No Answer destinations for additional extensions, press the volume up and down key or press the

HOLD key to move to the desired Extension.

11. Repeat steps 9-11 until all extension are entered.

12. Press the

MEMORY

key to exit the entry mode.

13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Enter CODE displays

Next extension number displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Caller ID Logging Extensions

Description

You can assign Caller ID Call Logging to extensions. The system is limited to 20 call logging extensions per cabinet as follows:

Number of Cabinets

3

4

1

2

5

6

Total Number of

Call Log Extensions

20

40

60

80

100

120

84 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Operation

To set a Caller ID Logging Extensions using either a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 10.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Enter log control number.

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Dial the extension number.

8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

9. To set CID Log for additional extensions, press the volume up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired Extension.

10. Repeat steps 6-8 until all extension are entered.

11. Press the

MEMORY

key to exit the entry mode.

12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

8110-

CID Logging EXT displays

CID Logging # displays

Next log control # displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Day of Week Mode

Description

(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page

40.)

The System allows you to specify up to 3 mode patterns. This menu item determines which pattern to follow for a given week day in the month (i.e., first Monday, second Monday, etc.).

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 85

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

Some bushiness may have special operating hours based on the day of the month. For instance, a company may work half-days on the second Saturday of each month.

Operation

To set the Day of Week Modes:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 07.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8107-

System Mode displays

4. Enter 3.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Enter pattern (0 - no pattern, 1 - pattern 1, 2 - pattern 2, 3 - pattern 3) for the first Sunday.

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the

FL/R

key.

8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

9. To set additional Day of Week modes, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired mode.

10. Repeat steps 7-9 until the remaining days in the month are set.

Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 10 on page 87.

11. Press the

MEMORY

key to exit the entry mode.

3-

D of Week PTN displays

300 :

1st SUN Pattern displays

Next Day of Week mode displays

Desired Day of Week mode displays

12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

3-

D of Week PTN displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

86 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Table 10. Day of the Week - addresses

ADDRESSES

FOR THESE

DAYS OF THE

WEEK:

Sunday

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Saturday

--

DAY OCCURRENCE

--

(e.g., 1st Sunday=address 300; 2nd Sunday=address 307)

1st

300

301

302

303

304

305

306

2nd

307

308

309

310

311

312

313

3rd

314

315

316

317

318

319

320

4th

321

322

323

324

325

326

327

5th

328

329

330

331

332

333

334

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Exception Day Mode

Description

(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page

40.)

You can specify exception days which allow for a range of days for the System to operate in the Night mode. This is intended for extended holidays for business shut down periods that last for multiple days. You can specify up to 6 exception day periods.

Operation

To set the Exception Day Modes:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 07.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8107-

System Mode displays

4. Enter 2.

5. Press the HOLD key.

2-

Mode Except Day displays

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 87

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

6. Press the HOLD key.

Action Result

200 :MMDD

PTN 1 Start Day displays

7. Enter the start date by month (two characters) and day (two characters) for Exception Period 1.

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.

8. Press the HOLD key.

201 :MMDD

PTN 1 Stop Day displays

9. Enter the stop date by month (two characters) and day (two characters) for Exception Period 1.

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.

10. Press the HOLD key.

11. To set additional Exception Day modes, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired mode.

12. Repeat steps 7-11 until all Exception Day modes are set.

(Up to 6 exception periods may be specified.)

Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 11 on page 88.

13. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.

Next Exception Day mode displays

Desired Exception Day mode displays

14. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

2-

Mode Except Day displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Table 11. Exception Days

8107-2 (200-211) Hold (MMDD) Hold

EXCEPTION DAYS:

200=Start - Exception Day 1

201=End - “ “

202=Start - Exception Day 2

203=End - “ “

204=Start - Exception Day 3

205=End - “ “

206=Start - Exception Day 4

207=End - “ “

208=Start - Exception Day 5

209=End - “ “

210=Start - Exception Day 6

211=End - “ “

Month/Day of Exception Days

(Start or End)

88 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Set Extension Names

Description

You can assign names to each extension, even if the extension is not a display telephone. When the extension is called, the name appears on the display. For more information on the digital key

telephone display, see “Display Information” on page 157.

Operation

To set extension names using either a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 03.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Dial the extension number.

7. Press the HOLD key.

8. Enter the extension name:

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

95.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.

9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.

• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

8103-

Extension Name displays

0 :

EXT Number/Name displays

Enter EXT # displays

A B C D E F XXX displays (where

XXX = extension number)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 89

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

Action

10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the desired speed dial name.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

12. To set additional extension names, press the volume up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired SSD.

13. Repeat steps 8-12 until all extension names are entered.

14. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.

15. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Next extension number displays

Enter EXT # displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Message Key ID Code

Description

(For a description of the Message Key ID Code Feature, see “Message Key ID Code” on page 74.)

On a large display phone you can use a Message key to either retrieve voice mail messages or respond to telephone messages. To respond to voice mail messages from a 3rd party voice mail system, you need to set the Message Key ID code to identify the caller to the voice mail system. You can also use the Message key to program a voice mail password.

Operation

To set the Message Key ID code:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 06.

3. Press the HOLD key.

4. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8106-

MSG Key ID Code displays

MSGID-EXT Number displays

90 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Action Result

5. Dial the extension number of the phone being programmed.

6. Press the HOLD key.

MSG-ID EXT XXX displays (where

XXX = extension number)

7. Enter the Message Key ID code.

Notes: The ID code may contain up to 16 digits and contain

0, 1-9, *, #, pause (REDIAL key).

To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.

8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

Next extension number displays

Desired extension number displays 9. To set additional Message Key ID codes, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired extension.

10. Repeat steps 7-9 until all Message Key ID codes are set.

11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.

12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

MSGID - EXT Number displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Mode Schedule

Description

(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page

40.)

You can set the System to automatically enter None, Day 1, Day 2, Night, Night (1), or Night (2) modes based upon mode patterns. You can define up to 3 patterns with up to 5 modes for each day.

(This menu allows the setting of the patterns.)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 91

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To set the Mode Schedule:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 07.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Press the HOLD key.

8107-

System Mode displays

0-

Mode Schedule displays

000 :HHMM

PTN 1-1 Start T displays

6. Enter the start time in hours (two characters) and minutes

(two characters) for the Pattern 1 - first mode.

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the

FL/R

key.

7. Press the HOLD key.

001 :

PTN 1-1 Mode displays

8. Enter the desired mode for Pattern 1 - first (0 - None, 1 -

Day 1, 2 - Day 2, 3 - Night, 4 - Night (1), 5 - Night (2)).

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.

9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

10. To set additional mode schedules, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired mode.

11. Repeat steps 6-10 until all patterns and modes are set.

(There are 3 total patterns with 5 start time/modes each.)

Note: Entry Positions are listed in Table 12 on page 93.

12. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.

Next pattern mode displays

Desired pattern mode displays

13. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

0-

Mode Schedule displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

92 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Table 12. Mode Schedule Patterns - addresses & values

FF8 1 07 0 (00-29) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold

-- ADDRESS NOs. (00-29) --

-- VALUES --

(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)

MODES

1st MODE 2nd MODE 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

00

01

10

11

20

21

02

03

12

13

22

23

04

05

14

15

24

25

06

07

16

17

26

27

08

09

18

19

28

29

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Personal Speed Dial Names

Description

For a description of Personal Speed Dial (PSD), see “Personal Speed Dial” on page 192 for a Digital

Key Telephone, “Personal Speed Dial” on page 255 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and

“Personal Speed Dial” on page 304 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 93

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To set PSD names using either a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 01.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8101-

PSD Assignment displays

4. Enter 1.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Dial the extension number.

8. Press the HOLD key.

9. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

10. Press the HOLD key.

11. Enter the PSD name:

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

95.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.

12. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.

• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

13. Repeat steps 11-12 as many times as necessary to enter the desired speed dial name.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

14. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

15. To set additional PSD names, press the volume up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired

PSD.

16. Repeat steps 11-15 until all PSD names are entered.

1 :

PSD Name displays

EXT Number displays

Enter PSD # XXX displays (where

XXX = dialled extension number)

A B C D E F PXX displays (where

PXX = PSD number)

Next PSD bin number displays

Desired PSD bin number displays

94 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Action

17. Press the MEMORY key to exit the PSD name entry mode.

18. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Enter PSD # XXX displays (where

XXX = extension number)

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Example 1. Large-Display Phone

To enter D: a. Press the first soft key on the top left.

b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.

To enter o: a. Press the third soft key from the top right.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 95

Chapter 4. User Maintenance b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.

Section 700 - Operation

Example 2. Small-Display Phone

Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press.

a b c d e f

A B C D E F g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x

G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X y z : & / sp

Y Z . , ’ -

To enter D: a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.

96 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.

Chapter 4. User Maintenance

To enter o: a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.

b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 97

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

Set Personal Speed Dial Numbers

Description

For a description of Personal Speed Dial (PSD), see “Personal Speed Dial” on page 192 for a Digital

Key Telephone, “Personal Speed Dial” on page 255 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and

“Personal Speed Dial” on page 304 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).

Operation

To set PSD numbers:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 01.

3. Press the HOLD key.

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Dial the extension number.

7. Press the HOLD key.

8. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

9. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8101-

PSD Assignment displays

0 :

PSD Number displays

EXT Number displays

Enter PSD # XXX displays (where

XXX = dialled extension number)

= extension number, YYY = assigned name, and ZZ = PSD bin number)

10. Enter the PSD digits to be dialled.

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.

11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

12. To set additional PSD numbers, press the volume up and down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired

PSD bin number.

13. Repeat steps 10-12 until all PSD numbers are entered.

14. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

Next PSD bin number displays

Desired PSD bin number displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

98 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

• N/A

Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Set Send Text Messages

Description

You can send a text message to a key telephone with a display when you are sending call waiting signal (Auto camp-on or manual camp-on). This menu item specifies the text messages that may be sent.

Operation

To set Send Text Messages using either a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 11.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8111-

Text Message displays

4. Enter 0.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Enter the Message number (0-9).

8. Press the HOLD key.

9. Enter the Text Message (up to 15 characters):

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

95.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.

10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.

• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

8111-0:

Send Message displays

Enter Msg # displays

A B C D E F X

displays (where X = Send Text Message number)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 99

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

Action

11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the desired Text Message.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

13. To set additional text Messages, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired

Send Text Message.

14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all Send Text Messages are entered.

15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.

16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Next message number displays

Desired Text Message displays

Enter Msg # displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Special Day Mode

Description

(For a description of Automatic Day/Night System Mode, see “Automatic Day/Night Mode” on page

40.)

You can specify up to 20 special days for the System. For each special day, you can specify up to 5 modes settings.

Operation

To set the Special Day Modes:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 07.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8107-

System Mode displays

4. Enter 1.

100 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Press the HOLD key.

Action Result

1-

Mode Special Day displays

1000 :MMDD

Special Day 01 displays

7. Enter the date by month (two characters) and day (two characters) for the Special Day 1.

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the

FL/R

key.

8. Press the HOLD key.

1001 :HHMM

S Day 01-1 Start displays

9. Enter the start time in hours (two characters) and minutes

(two characters) for mode 1.

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.

10. Press the HOLD key.

1002 :

S Day 01-1 Mode displays

11. Enter the desired mode for Special Day ( (0 - None, 1 -

Day 1, 2 - Day 2, 3 - Night, 4 - Night(1), 5 - Night (2)).

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the

FL/R

key.

12. Press the HOLD key.

13. To set additional Special Day modes, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired mode.

14. Repeat steps 7-13 until all Special Day modes are set. (Up to 20 special days may be entered.)

Note: The entry positions are listed in Table 13.

15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.

Next Special Day mode displays

16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

1-

Mode Special Day displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 101

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

Table 13. Special Day Start Time/Mode - addresses & values

FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold

-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --

-- VALUES --

(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)

MODES

1st MODE 2nd MODE 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE

Special Day 1

Special Day 2

Special Day 3

Special Day 4

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

1000

1001

1002

1011

1012

1013

1022

1023

1024

1033

1034

1035

1003

1004

1014

1015

1025

1026

1036

1037

1005

1006

1016

1017

1027

1028

1038

1039

1007

1008

1018

1019

1029

1030

1040

1041

1009

1010

1020

1021

1031

1032

1042

1043

102 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold

-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --

-- VALUES --

(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)

MODES

1st MODE 2nd MODE 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE

Special Day 5

Special Day 6

Special Day 7

Special Day 8

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

1044

1045

1046

1055

1056

1057

1066

1067

1068

1077

1078

1079

1047

1048

1058

1059

1069

1070

1080

1081

1049

1050

1060

1061

1071

1072

1082

1083

1051

1052

1062

1063

1073

1074

1084

1085

1053

1054

1064

1065

1075

1076

1086

1087

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 103

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold

-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --

-- VALUES --

(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)

MODES

1st MODE 2nd MODE 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE

Special Day 9

Special Day 10

Special Day 11

Special Day 12

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

1088

1089

1090

1099

1100

1101

1110

1111

1112

1121

1122

1123

1091

1092

1102

1103

1113

1114

1124

1125

1093

1094

1104

1105

1115

1116

1126

1127

1095

1096

1106

1107

1117

1118

1128

1129

1097

1098

1108

1109

1119

1120

1130

1131

104 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold

-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --

-- VALUES --

(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)

MODES

1st MODE 2nd MODE 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE

Special Day 13

Special Day 14

Special Day 15

Special Day 16

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

1132

1133

1134

1143

1144

1145

1154

1155

1156

1165

1166

1167

1135

1136

1146

1147

1157

1158

1168

1169

1137

1138

1148

1149

1159

1162

1170

1171

1139

1140

1150

1151

1161

1162

1172

1173

1141

1142

1152

1153

1163

1164

1174

1175

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 105

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

FF8 1 07 1 (1000-1219) Hold (MMDD or HHMM or 0-5) Hold

-- ADDRESS NOs. (1000-1219) --

-- VALUES --

(MMDD, HHMM, or 0-5)

MODES

1st MODE 2nd MODE 3rd MODE 4th MODE 5th MODE

Special Day 17

Special Day 18

Special Day 19

Special Day 20

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

Date

(MMDD)

Start Time

(HHMM)

Mode (0-5):

0=None

1=Day 1

2=Day 2

3=Night

4=Night (1)

5=Night (2)

1176

1177

1178

1187

1188

1189

1198

1199

1200

1209

1210

1211

1179

1180

1190

1191

1201

1202

1212

1213

1181

1182

1192

1193

1203

1204

1214

1215

1183

1184

1194

1195

1205

1206

1216

1217

1185

1186

1196

1197

1207

1208

1218

1219

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

106 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

• N/A

Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Set System Date/Time/Day

Description

The System allows you to change the date, time, and day of week. When setting the time, you can specify 12 or 24 hour format.

Operation

To change the system date, time, and day of week:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 000.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

4. Enter the year (two characters), month (two characters), and day (two characters).

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.

5. Press the HOLD key.

8. Enter the day of week where:

1 = Mon, 2 = Tues., 3 = Wed., 4 = Thurs., 5 = Fri., 6 = Sat.,

0 = Sun.

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.

9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

10. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

0 :YYMMDD

Date displays

6. Enter the hour (two characters) and minute (two characters).

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.

7. Press the HOLD key.

1 :HHMM

Time displays

2 :

Day of the Week displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 107

Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Section 700 - Operation

Set System Speed Dial Index

Description

For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 194 for a Digital

Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 257 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and

“System Speed Dial” on page 305 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).

Operation

To set SSD index using either a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 02.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8102-

SSD Assignment displays

4. Enter 2.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Enter the SSD Index number (1 - 2).

8. Press the HOLD key.

9. Enter the SSD Index name:

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

95.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)

Note: Press the

FL/R

key to clear any existing data.

2 :

SSD Index displays

Enter Index # displays

A B C D E F XXX displays (where

XXX = SSD bin number)

108 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Action

10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.

• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the desired SSD name.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

13. To set additional SSD index names, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired

SSD.

14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all SSD indexes are entered.

15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.

16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Next SSD index number displays

Desired SSD index number displays

Enter SSD # displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set System Speed Dial Names

Description

For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 194 for a Digital

Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 257 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and

“System Speed Dial” on page 305 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).

Operation

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 109

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

To set SSD names using either a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 02.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8102-

SSD Assignment displays

4. Enter 1.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

8. Press the HOLD key.

9. Enter the SSD name:

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

95.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.

10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.

• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the desired SSD name.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

13. To set additional SSD names, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired SSD.

14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all SSD names are entered.

15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.

16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

1 :

SSD Name displays

Enter SSD # displays

A B C D E F XXX displays (where

XXX = SSD bin number)

Next SSD bin number displays

Desired SSD bin number displays

Enter SSD # displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

110 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Set System Speed Dial Numbers

Description

For a description of System Speed Dial (SSD), see “System Speed Dial” on page 194 for a Digital

Key Telephone, “System Speed Dial” on page 257 for a Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT), and

“System Speed Dial” on page 305 for a Single Line Telephone (SLT).

Operation

To set SSD numbers:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 02.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

7. Press the HOLD key.

8. Enter the SSD digits to be dialled.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear an entry or any existing data.

9. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

10. To set additional SSD numbers, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired

SSD.

11. Repeat steps 8-10 until all SSDs are entered.

12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

8102-

SSD Assignment displays

0 :

SSD Number displays

Enter SSD # displays

-SSDXXX

XXX displays (where

XXX = SSD bin number)

Next SSD bin number displays

Desired SSD bin number displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 111

Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Section 700 - Operation

Set Text Message Replies

Description

This menu item specifies reply text messages.

Operation

To set Text Message Replies using either a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 11.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

8111-

Text Message displays

4. Enter 1.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Enter the Message number (0-9).

8. Press the HOLD key.

9. Enter the Text Message (up to 15 characters):

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

95.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 96.)

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data.

8111-1 :

Reply Message displays

Enter Msg # displays

A B C D E F X

displays (where X = Reply Text Message number)

112 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Action

10. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See Example 1. Large-Display Phone on page 95.

• See Example 2. Small-Display Phone on page 96.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

11. Repeat steps 9-10 as many times as necessary to enter the desired Text Message.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

12. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

13. To set additional text Messages, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired

Send Text Message.

14. Repeat steps 9-13 until all Text Message Replies are entered.

15. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.

16. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Next message number displays

Desired Text Message displays

Enter Msg # displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Verified Account Codes

Description

(For a description of Verified Account Codes, see “Verified Account Codes” on page 123.)

You can enter up to 500 Verified Account codes. The System will store them in memory as valid codes. Once the codes are entered here, a Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Class of

Service (COS) can be used with each code. You can then enter your code on someone else’s phone to bypass the TRS (Call Barring) restrictions on that phone. (The TRS (Call Barring) assigned to the

Verified Account code will override the phone’s TRS.)

Operation

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 113

Chapter 4. User Maintenance Section 700 - Operation

To set the Verified Account code:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 04.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Enter the Verified Account table number (001-500).

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Press the HOLD key.

8104-

Verified ACCD displays

Table Number displays

XXX-

Verified ACCD displays (where XXX

= account code table number)

0001 : AAAAAAAAAAA

XXX:Account Code displays (where

AAAAAAAAAAA = current account code and XXX = account code table number)

8. Enter up to ten-digit Verified Account Code. (All Verified

Account Codes must be unique. If there is a matching entry entered, the System will not accept the entry and will double beep.)

Note: To clear an entry or existing data, press the FL/R key.

9. Press the HOLD key.

0002 :X

XXX:TRS Class displays (where X =

TRS Class)

10. Enter the TRS (Call Barring) Class to be associated with the Verified Account Code entry.

11. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

0001 :YYY displays (where YYY = the next account code table number)

Desired Verified Account table number displays

12. To add additional Verified Account numbers, press the volume up or down key or press the HOLD key to move to the desired Verified Account table number.

13. Repeat steps 8-12 until all Verified Account numbers are entered.

14. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode

15. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

Table Number

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

114 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 4. User Maintenance

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes

Description

You can assign Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes for each extension.

Operation

To set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes using either a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. If not already in User Maintenance mode, enter User Main-

tenance mode. (See “To enter User Maintenance mode:” on page 79.)

2. At the 81 level, enter 08.

3. Press the HOLD key.

Result

81-

User MAINT displays

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Dial the extension number.

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Enter the 4-digit Walking TRS (Call Barring) Code.

8. Press the HOLD key to store the entry.

9. To set additional extension Walking TRS (Call Barring)

Codes, press the volume up and down key or press the

HOLD key to move to the desired Extension.

10. Repeat steps 8-10 until all extension are entered.

11. Press the MEMORY key to exit the entry mode.

12. To return to the top menu level (81), press the PROG key.

OR...

To exit the User Maintenance mode, press the ON/OFF key.

8108-

Walking TRS Cod displays

Walking ID-Ext displays

Walking ID XXX displays

Next extension number displays

81-

User MAINT displays

OR...

ON/OFF LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 115

Chapter 4. User Maintenance

This page intentionally left blank.

Section 700 - Operation

116 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

This chapter describes Key telephone features. Key telephones are proprietary digital phones that provide feature access through a combination of feature keys and access codes.

This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic

Key Telephone

Absence Message

Account Codes

Non-Verified Account Codes

Verified Account Codes

Attendant Group Calls

Auto Repeat Dial

Background Music

Busy Override

Callback Request

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding-All Calls

Call Forwarding - Busy

Call Forwarding - No Answer

Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb

Call Hold

System Hold

Floating Hold

Exclusive Hold

Broker’s Hold

Call Park

Call Hold

Extension Group Pickup

Extension Direct Pickup

Trunk Group Pickup

Trunk Direct Pickup

Call Transfer

Supervised Transfer

Unsupervised Transfer

Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension

Caller ID Call Log

Camp-on (Call Waiting)

Conference Calls

Directory Numbers

Page

120

126

127

128

129

133

134

135

135

136

133

129

130

131

132

133

139

140

140

141

142

120

122

123

123

124

125

142

143

143

144

149

151

153

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 117

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

118

Topic

Display Information

Caller ID Display Information

Large-Display Phone

Small-Display Phone

Changing the Display Contrast

Do-Not-Disturb

DP to DTMF Signal Conversion

DSS/72 Console

EM/24 Console

Flash

Flexible Function Keys

Handsfree Answerback

Handsfree Operation

Headset Operation

Hot Dial Pad

Hot Line

Intercom Calling

Last Number Redial

Line Appearances

DSS/BLF Appearances

DIL Appearances

MCO Appearances

Message Key

Message Waiting/Callback

Mute Function

Offhook Monitor

Offhook Signalling

Offhook Voice Announce

One-Touch Keys

Onhook Dialling

Paging

Meet-Me Answer

Ringing Line Preference

Room Monitoring

Silent Monitor

Speed Dialling

Personal Speed Dial

System Speed Dial

Speed Dial Linking

ICX (International) issued October 2000

Page

157

172

172

173

174

174

175

176

177

178

169

170

170

171

161

162

162

163

157

158

159

159

159

161

184

185

186

187

188

188

190

192

192

194

196

179

180

180

181

Section 700 - Operation

ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Topic

Speed Dial Name Assignments

Station Lockout

Step Call (Reset Call)

Timed Reminder Call

Trunk Access

Trunk Key Access

Direct Trunk Access

MCO Line Preference

MCO Trunk Access

Trunk Queuing

Universal Night Answer to Page

Variable Mode

Voice Recognition

Volume Control

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service

Zip Mode

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Page

197

202

210

210

212

213

214

215

204

205

206

206

207

207

208

209

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 119

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Key Telephone

As an example of a key telephone, Figure 2 illustrates the Panasonic model VB-44225/VB-

D411LDSUK. This model provides a large display that includes one-touch access to speed dial numbers, telephone features, and Help screens.

Figure 2. Large Display Key Telephone

Absence Message

Description

Extension users can leave text messages on their phones when they are away. When the unattended extension is dialed, the text message displays on the caller’s phone. Any one of the following messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 have no default message text. All the messages can be changed through system programming.

Beginning with Version 5.0, an LED lamp on the Absence Message key will light red when this feature is active.

120 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Table 14. Absence Messages

Message No.

2

3

0

1

4

Message Text

In Meeting

At Lunch

Out of Office

Vacation

Another Office

Message No.

7

8

5

6

9

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Message Text

Absence_No_5

Absence_No_6

Absence_No_7

Absence_No_8

Absence_No_9

Optionally, a return time can be input. Example Return Times for Absence Messages include

Input

No input

9

11

615

1035

Display

Return

Return 9:00

Return 11:00

Return 6:15

Return 10:35

Operation

To set an Absence Message

Action Result

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729 [UK/HK] or 729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Intercom dial tone

Enter Msg Code # displays

3. Enter the Absence Message number. (See Table 14 above.)

Enter XXXX Hold

In Meeting displays

4. If desired, enter the 4-digit returning time.

5. Press HOLD key.

Absence message displays

ABS MSG Accepted displays;

LED lamp lights red on Absence Message key

6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

To cancel an Absence Message

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Absence Message code (default =729 [UK/HK] or

729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Press HOLD key.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter MSG Code displays

ABS MSG Cleared displays

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 121

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Calling parties without a display get a ring back tone, rather than the Absence Message.

• If a message code number that has not been programmed is selected,

Absence No.n

, appears on the display (n = message number).

• Regardless of setting an Absence Message on a DDI/DL extension, DDI/DL calls are routed according to the trunk ringing setting.

• An absence message may also be cancelled by dialling 7**. This cancels Do-Not-Disturb (DND) and Call Forwarding-All Calls as well.

Account Codes

Description

You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the System

Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging) record.

In addition verified account codes may be used to change the TRS (Call Barring) level to allow calls to numbers otherwise restricted.

Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.

This feature works with SMDR (Call Logging). During a phone call, a station user can silently enter an accounting or client billing code. The entered Code will display on the phone’s LCD as it’s dialled, so the user can tell it’s being registered. Then later, the Call Logging reports will show the Code dialled for each call, and even sort the report by these Codes.

There are two different types of account codes: Non-Verified and Verified Account Codes. Prior to

Version 5.0, the maximum amount of account code numbers for both types could range from 1-10 digits. Beginning with Version 5.0, a second mode has been added that allows the user to set the maximum amount of account code numbers from 1-4 digits. An account code error will occur when more than the maximum number of digits are entered.

Non-Verified Account Codes

Non-Verified Codes aren’t checked by the system for validity. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits.

Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced

Account Codes (the user must enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can enter a code, but doesn’t have to, for each call).

Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to incoming and/or outgoing calls. For incoming calls, the user can enter the Code anytime during the call. For outgoing calls, the user either enters the Code before accessing an outside line (for forced Codes), or anytime during the call (for voluntary Codes).

Verified Account Codes

Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a code that has been preprogrammed into an Account Code Table. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits.

These codes can also be either forced or voluntary. You can program these codes with their own

122 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Class assignment so that, when entered, they will override the extension’s TRS (Call Barring) Class. Thus, Verified Account Code users can “float” from phone to phone, placing calls that would normally be restricted on that phone.

Non-Verified Account Codes

Non-verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code before making a call.)

You can assign Non-verified Account codes to both incoming and outgoing calls. To assign an account code to an outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call or during the call.

To assign an account code to an incoming call, you enter the account code during the call.

Operation

To enter an account code before making a call:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).

3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).

4. Press the # key.

5. Press a vacant trunk key or enter a Trunk Access Code

(default = 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

6. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter Account # displays

Specified account code displays

Specified account code # displays

CO Trunk Key LED lights

Dialled phone number displays

To enter an account code during an outside call:

Action

1. During a call, press the MEMORY key.

2. Press the # key.

3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).

4. Press the # key.

Result

Enter Account # displays

Specified account code displays

Display returns to call state.

Verified Account Codes

Stations restricted from outside call origination by TRS (Call Barring) can be allowed to make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS (Call Barring). After a call is made, the Call Logging record for the call will show the verified account code.

Operation

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 123

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

To make an outside call that requires an account code:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).

3. Enter the Account Code (10 digits max.).

4. Press the # key.

5. Press a vacant trunk key or enter a Trunk Access Code

(default = 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

6. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter Account # displays

Specified code displays

Specified account code # displays

CO Trunk Key LED lights

Dialled phone number displays

Hardware Requirements

• An Call Logging printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code records.

Considerations

• Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.

• Account codes will be cancelled after using trunk queuing.

• Account Codes interact with TRS (Call Barring) as shown in the following table:

Forced or Not Forced

Not Forced

Forced

Verified or

Non-Verified

Non-Verified

Verified

Non-Verified

Verified

TRS (Call Barring) Class

No Account Entry Account Entry

Extension Port Based TRS

Class

TRS (Call Barring) Class for Forced Account Code

(FF1 0 19 0001)

Extension Port Based TRS

Class

Account Code Based TRS

Class

Extension Port Based TRS

Class

Account Code Based TRS

Class

Attendant Group Calls

CPC-96, CPC-288, and CPC-576 All Versions

Description

You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialling the designated attendant number.

124 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Operation

To call an attendant group:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0 [UK/HK] or 9

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call Attendant displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.

• The attendant pilot number is flexible.

• If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialled.

Auto Repeat Dial

Description

If you press the FL/R key while receiving busy tone on an outside call, the System automatically redials the number. The System continues to redial the number at set intervals until the called number answers, the caller hangs up, or the maximum of 15 redial attempts is made.

Operation

To use Auto Repeat Dial:

Action

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press a vacant trunk key or enter a Trunk Access Code

(default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or or 81-84).

3. Dial the phone number.

4. Press the FL/R key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Trunk key LED lights

• Dialled phone number displays

• Busy tone

System automatically redials number

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 125

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Background Music

Description

If your System is set up to provide Background Music, music can be played from the speakers of idle telephones. If a call is made to an extension receiving Background Music, the music stops and the phone rings. Background Music is also interrupted when the phone goes offhook.

The System can also provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) using a separate music source (except with

CPC-HS). If MOH is provided, callers automatically hear music when they are placed on hold. (For

more information on MOH, see page 49.)

Operation

To turn Background Music on:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

BGM ON displays

To turn Background Music off:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

BGM OFF displays

Hardware Requirements

• The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.

Important: A license may be required from the Society of Composers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit radio or recorded music through the MOH and/or Background Music feature. Panasonic, its distributors, and affiliates assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment fail to obtain such a license.

Considerations

• N/A

126 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Busy Override

Description

Busy Override allows you to break into another user’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent information or to create three-party conference calls.

Operation

To break into a call with a line appearance on your phone (Trunk Key Busy Override):

Action

1. Press the lit direct trunk key.

Result

• Alert tone sounds to both phones (System programming required)

• Connected to both parties

To use Extension Busy Override:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9 [UK/HK] or 9#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

• Dialled extension number displays

• Busy tone

• Alert tone sounds to both extensions

(System programming required)

• Connection to both parties

OVR1: (name of overriding exten-

sion) and OVR2: (extension name

for current talk path) displays on both extensions

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.

• The default for the Override Alert Tone is off. If the Override Alert Tone is enabled, the tone will be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.

• Beginning with Version 4.0 and higher, certain extensions can be excluded from busy override based on Class of Service.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 127

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Callback Request

Section 700 - Operation

Description

If you dial a busy extension, Callback Request enables the System to call you back when that extension becomes free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.

Operation

To set a Callback Request:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

• Dialled extension number displays

• Busy tone

Ringback tone 3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or

3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.

System calls back when called extension becomes free

To respond to a callback request:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

Result

System automatically redials extension

To cancel a Callback Request (Version 3.0 and higher):

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the Callback cancellation code (default = 769 [UK/HK] or 769# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset .

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

• FF1-2-03: Dial Plan (Callback Cancel)

Considerations

• N/A

128 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Call Forwarding

Description

Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to Voice

Mail. Call Forwarding can be set or cancelled under the following conditions from either your own extension or from an alternate extension:

• Call Forwarding - All Calls

• Call Forwarding - Busy

• Call Forwarding - No Answer

Call Forwarding-All Calls

When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately forwarded. Beginning with Version 5.0, a Flexible Function key can be programmed so that the LED indicates when this feature is active. The LED will light red when Call Forwarding-All Calls is set.

To set Call Forwarding-All Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 721 (UK/HK) or 721# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 741 (UK/HK) or 741# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.

4. Enter the destination number:

• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension number.

• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then enter the SSD bin number.

Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programmed into speed dialling. (For informa-

tion, see “Speed Dialling” on page 192.)

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 129

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 751 (UK/HK) or 751# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call Forwarding - Busy

When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.

Operation

To set Call Forwarding - Busy:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 722 (UK/HK) or 722# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 742 (UK/HK) or 742# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the number of the extension whose calls you want to forward.

4. Enter the destination number:

• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension number.

• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then enter the SSD bin number.

Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programmed into speed dialling. (For informa-

tion, see “Speed Dialling” on page 192.)

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

130 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 732 (UK/HK) or 732# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 752 (UK/HK) or 752# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call Forwarding - No Answer

When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call Forward - No Answer timer expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.

Operation

To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 723 (UK/HK) or 723# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 743 (UK/HK) or 743# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.

4. Dial the destination number:

• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension number.

• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then enter the SSD bin number.

Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programmed into speed dialling. (For informa-

tion, see “Speed Dialling” on page 192.)

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 131

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 733 (UK/HK) or 733# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 753 (UK/HK) or 753# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb

The System allows you to cancel both Call Forwarding-All Calls and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your own extension in one step.

Operation

To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls and DND:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the CF-All/DND Clear code (default = 7**).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding or DND activated.

(For example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.

• If forwarding to an outside number, the destination number must be pre-programmed into a

System Speed Dial (SSD) code.

• Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.

• You can set Call Forwarding - All Calls while Call Forwarding - No Answer and/or Call

Forwarding - Busy are set. Cancelling one mode only affects that mode; however, the other modes will remain set until cancelled individually.

• An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.

• If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call

Forward No Answer destination.

• You can cancel both Call Forwarding-All Calls and DND by entering 7 * *.

132 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

• Beginning with Version 4.0 and higher, calls can be forwarded by an extension with an NPDN or

PNPDN if the COS gives permission. See “Directory Numbers” on page 153 for more

information.

Call Hold

Description

The System provides the following types of Call Hold or Call Park:

• System Hold

• Floating Hold

• Exclusive Hold

• Broker’s Hold

• Station Call Park

System Hold

You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on

System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.

Operation

To place a call on System Hold:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

Result

• Intercom dial tone

Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX

= outside line number)

To retrieve a call placed on System Hold from the extension that placed it there:

Action

1. Press the line key that is flashing green or press the HOLD key if a non-appearing trunk call.

Result

CO XXX displays (where XXX = outside line number)

To retrieve a call placed on System Hold from an extension other than the one that put it there:

Action

1. Press the line key that is flashing red.

Result

CO XXX displays (where XXX = outside line number)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 133

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code (default = *0).

3. Enter the trunk number.

Section 700 - Operation

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter TRK # displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Floating Hold

Floating Hold is a type of System Hold that allows you to retrieve a held call from any extension that has an FF key assigned to the same Floating Hold orbit where the call is held. You can also retrieve a call by dialling the Floating Hold orbit number for the held call.

Floating Hold is useful when the intended recipient of a call must be located via a page. The call can be placed in a Floating Hold “orbit” and that orbit number announced during the page. The paged party can then pick up the call by dialling the orbit number or by pressing an FF key assigned to that orbit number.

Note:

To place a call on Floating Hold, you should have at least one FF key assigned to a Floating

Hold orbit number (001-576).

Operation

To place a call on Floating Hold:

Action

1. While on a call, press the Floating FF key (system programming required) or press the HOLD key.

Result

• Intercom dial tone

Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX

= outside line number)

To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:

Action

1. (A) Press the FF key assigned to the Floating Hold orbit number where the call is held.

OR...

(A) Enter the Floating Hold Answer feature access code

(default = *9).

(B) Enter the Floating Hold orbit number (001-576) CPC-

288/576), 01-96 (CPC-96) or 001-099 (CPC-288/576) or

01-09 (CPC-96) (See considerations below.)

Result

CO XXX displays if line released (where

XXX = outside line number)

134 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The number of floating hold orbits available may very depending on the Station/Floating Park

Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0025). The call pickup access code can set to *9 (default). The

*9” access code operates as follows:

System Size

96

Above 96

Virtual Line Number and Operation

01-09: Floating Hold pick up

10-96: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose

001-099: Floating Hold pick up

100-576: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose

Exclusive Hold

With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used to hold trunk calls and extension calls.

Operation

To place a call on Exclusive Hold:

Action

1. While on a call, press the trunk key used for the call or press the HOLD key.

Result

• Intercom dial tone

Hold CO XXX displays (where XXX

= outside line number)

To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:

Action

1. Press the trunk key on which the call is held.

Result

• Trunk LED stops flashing, remains green

CO XXX displays if call released

(where XXX = outside line number)

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive when placed on hold by pressing the HOLD key.

Broker’s Hold

Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by pressing the

HOLD key.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 135

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Operation

To place a call on Broker’s Hold:

1. Pick up the first call.

2. Press the HOLD key.

3. Pick up the second call.

4. Press the HOLD key.

Action

Section 700 - Operation

Result

First call on hold

Second call on hold, first call retrieved

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• In order to use Broker’s Hold with trunk calls, the first call must have a possible appearance and non-appearance, but in the case of appearance, the first call must be one of trunk key.

Call Park

You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient of the call.

Trunk, Extension, and Network calls may be parked.

There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the ICX . One way is to park the call at the receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialling the park answer code plus the parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call. Beginning with Version 5.0, the user may park the call at another extension by pressing the BLF key. In addition, an Extension

Group Pickup code allows the user to pick up a Transfer Recall (only on non-appearing calls), a Hold

Recall, and a Station Park Recall.

To park a call on this extension:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

Result

• Current call on hold

CO HOLD #XX displays (where XX = trunk number)

Accepted ST-Park displays 2. Enter the Call Park Hold access code (default = 771 [UK/

HK] or 771# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) or press the

PARK HOLD key.

3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.

136 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Enter the Call Park Answer/Other Ext. access code (default

= 773 [UK/HK] or 733# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

OR...

Enter the Call Park/Floating Hold Answer feature access code (default = *9). (Version 3.0 and higher)

2. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter Park EXT # displays

CO TALK TRK #XX displays (where

XX = line number)

• Connected to parked call

To park a call at another extension:

Action

1. Press the HOLD key.

2. Enter the Call Park Transfer access code (default = 774

[UK/HK] or 774# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call,

OR

Press the BLF key

4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.

Result

• Current call on hold

CO HOLD #XX displays (where XX = trunk number)

Enter TRNS EXT # displays

Park (ext#) displays on lower display

To retrieve a transferred call park:

Action

1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter Call Park Answer/Self access code (default = 772

[UK/HK] or 772# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

CO TALK TRK #XX displays (where

XX = line number)

• Connected to parked call

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• You cannot park more than one call at a time.

Call Park functions can be assigned to FF keys (see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 163).

• No more than one Call Park Answer key may be assigned to a single telephone.

• A Call Park Answer key may not be assigned to the EM/24 or DSS/72 console.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 137

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

• If a call is parked by Call Park key, the LED flashes.

• LCD softkeys are also available for Call Park.

• Once a call is parked, it cannot be accessed by the trunk key or direct trunk access (similar to exclusive hold).

• If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the parked call.

• Depending on the Station/Floating Park Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0025), the call pickup access code can set to *9 (default), 773 (UK/HK), or 773# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia). The

*9” access code operates as follows:

System Size

96

Above 96

Virtual Line Number and Operation

01-09: Floating Hold pick up

10-96: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose

001-099: Floating Hold pick up

100-576: For Station Park Hold pick up purpose

138 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Call Pickup

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Description

The System allows the following types of call pickup:

• Extension Group Pickup

• Extension Direct Pickup

• Trunk Group Pickup

• Trunk Direct Pickup

Extension Group Pickup

Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.

Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:

Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension group.

Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own extension group.

Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension group.

Operation

To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default

= 701 [UK/HK] or 701# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Extension number or outside phone number displays

To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code

(default = 702 [UK/HK] or 702# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Extension number or outside phone number displays

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 139

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

To use Specified Group Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703 [UK/

HK] or 703# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the call is ringing.

4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Extension number or outside phone number displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Extension Group Pickup - 12 / CCU - maximum 72 group / 6 CCU configuration

• The Call Pickup Group assignments determine the order calls are picked up (i.e. if two calls are ringing in the call pickup group, the call ringing the first member will be picked up first).

Extension Direct Pickup

Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialling the number of the ringing extension.

Operation

To use Extension Direct Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704

[UK/HK] or 704# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Extension number or outside phone number displays

4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Trunk Group Pickup

Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO incoming trunk group.

140 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Operation

To use Trunk Group Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code (default = 709 [UK/

HK] or 709# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Extension number or outside phone number displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Trunk Direct Pickup

Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number.

Operation

To use Trunk Direct Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code (default = *0).

3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system) trunk.

4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Outside number displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Calls in Exclusive Hold cannot be picked up.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 141

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Call Transfer

Section 700 - Operation

Description

The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to transfer a call to a busy extension.)

Supervised Transfer

When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party answers, then he/she announces the call.

Operation

To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.

3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.

4. Complete the transfer:

• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS, replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or

RELEASE key if using DSS/72).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Talk-EXT Name or Number displays

142

To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Seize a trunk line and dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.

3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.

4. Complete the transfer:

• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS, complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON/OFF key.

• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or

RELEASE key is using DSS/72).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Talk-EXT XXX displays (where XXX = extension)

Original call LED light turns red

ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Unsupervised Transfer

When completing an unsupervised transfer, the transferring party hangs up before the third party answers.

Operation

To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.

3. Complete the transfer:

• If On-Hook transfer is enabled for your Extension COS, replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

• If On-Hook is disabled, press the PROG key (or

RELEASE key if using DSS/72).

Result

Intercom dial tone

To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Press a vacant trunk key or enter a trunk access code

(default = 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.

4. Complete the transfer:

• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS, complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON/OFF key.

• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or

RELEASE key is using DSS/72).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension

Operation

To camp a call onto a busy extension:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 143

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Action

3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-on activated, enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/

HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indondesia]).

4. Complete the transfer:

• If On-Hook Transfer is enabled for your Extension COS, complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON/OFF key

• If On-Hook Transfer is disabled, press the PROG key (or

RELEASE key is using DSS/72).

Result

Camp-on tone heard at the called extension

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• If On-Hook Transfer is not enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service (COS), he/she must press the PROG or RELEASE key before hanging up to complete the transfer.

• If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call will recall to the transferring extension.

• Beginning with Version 5.0, a Transfer Recall (only non-appearing calls) may be answered on another extension using the Call Pickup feature. However, an incoming Transfer Recall cannot be picked up during conversation.

• If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert to the Attendant group.

• If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.

• You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.

• You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension

221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to extension 225.

• Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.

• If a call is unsupervised transferred to a busy extension, the call will camp on to the busy extension.

• To transfer to a outside party, it is best to use supervised transfer. If the trunk-to-trunk on-hook transfer restriction is enabled, a blind transfer will result in the loss of the second call but the second call will be kept on hold. If not enabled and the second outside party is busy, the transferred party will receive busy.

Caller ID Call Log

Description

(Note: Analog Caller ID is not available in the UK, TX, or EX model).

144 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

The Call Log keeps a record of Caller ID calls to individual phones. The Call Log allows you to view

Caller ID calls that have been sent to your phone and, if desired, return a call.

The following table shows maximum number of extensions that may have call logs and the number of entries.

Table 15. Call log maximums

Call Log Maximums Maximum

Maximum number of extensions with Call Log

Number of log entries that can be stored for an extension. (After the call log fills with 10 entries, each additional entry overwrites the oldest log entry.)

20 per CCU

10

The Call Log stores information for Caller ID calls that ring a phone. If the phone does not ring (for instance when Call Forward - All Calls is active), there is no entry in the Call Log for that call.

Each Call Log entry includes the following call information:

• Calling number

• Time and date

• Whether the call was answered

• How the call was routed.

The most recent entries are stored first in the Call Log.

Call Log Operation on a Small Display Key Telephone

Operation

To view the Call Log:

Action

1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).

3. Press the following keys to view the call log:

# - Move forward in call log

* - Move back in call log

4. Exit the Call Log by going on hook or by pressing the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Phone enters call log mode.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 145

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Example Caller ID Call Log (Small Display Telephone):

Call Result

(blank) - Answered

- Calling Party

Hung Up

- Answered by

Someone Else

08:30 Fri Oct 24

01:2015553678

Call Log Entry Number (01 - 10)

Time and Date of Call

Calling Number

146

To outdial from the Call Log:

Action

1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).

3. Press the following keys to view the call log:

# - Move forward in call log

* - Move back in call log

4. To return a call, (and exit the Call Log):

Press the left EXEC key to access Access MCO 1 (dial 9

[UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Indonesia, Malaysia]), dial add digits if required (usually “1” in USA only), and dial the displayed caller ID number.

OR...

Press the right EXEC key (soft key) to access Access

MCO 1 (dial 9 [UK/HK] or 0 ]Taiwan, Indonesia, Malaysia]), and dial the caller ID number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Phone enters call log mode.

To store the Call Log number in a personal speed dial:

Action

1. Go off-hook or the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).

3. Press the following keys to view the call log:

# - Move forward in call log

* - Move back in call log

4. To store the call log number in a personal speed dial:

Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99) and press the left EXEC key (to dial the add digits, usually an area code) and press the HOLD key.

OR...

Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99) and press the right EXEC key (soft key) and press the

HOLD key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Phone enters call log mode.

ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Call Log Operation on a Large Display Key Telephone

Operation

To view the Call Log:

Action

1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).

3. Press the following keys to view the call log:

# - Move forward in call log

* - Move back in call log

NEXT - View the next 5 calls

PREV - View the previous 5 calls

4. Exit the Call Log by going on hook or by pressing the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Phone enters call log mode.

Example Caller ID Call Log (Large Display Telephone):

Call Log Entry Number (01 - 10)

Call Result

(blank) - Answered

- Calling Party

Hung Up

- Answered by

Someone Else

08:30 Fri Oct 24

01:2015553678

01:2015553678

02:2015554444

03:2015553456

04:4045554321

05:4045557654

Time and Date of Call

Calling Number

To outdial from the Call Log:

Action

1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Phone enters call log mode.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 147

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Action

3. Press the following keys to view the call log:

# - Move forward in call log

* - Move back in call log

NEXT - View the next 5 calls

PREV - View the previous 5 calls

4. To return a call, (and exit the Call Log)

Press the Soft key to the left of the desired number to access Access MCO 1 (dial 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia]), dial add digits if required (in USA only, usually “1” ), and dial the displayed caller ID #.

OR...

Press the Soft key to the right of the desired number to access MCO 1 (dial 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia,

Indonesia]), and dial the caller ID #.

Result

To store the Call Log number in a personal speed dial:

Action

1. Go off-hook or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Call Log feature code (default = CONF 96).

3. Press the following keys to view the call log:

# - Move forward in call log

* - Move back in call log

NEXT - View the next 5 calls

PREV - View the previous 5 calls

4. To store the call log number in a personal speed dial:

Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99) and press the left Soft key (to dial the add digits, usually an area code) and press the HOLD key.

OR...

Press the PROG key, the speed dial bin number (80-99) and press the right Soft key and press the HOLD key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Phone enters call log mode.

Hardware Requirements

• Caller ID daughter circuit card on the Loop Start Trunk Card if a Loop Start Trunk receives the call.

• ISDN (PRI-T Point) if ISDN card receives the call.

• Large Display Telephone or 44-Series Small Display Telephone.

Considerations

• Caller ID is available ISDN PRI.

Caller ID circuit card must be installed and enabled. (See “Caller ID” on page 29).

148 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

• Caller ID is typically 10 digits. If the local calling area requires 7-digit dialling, the call log outdialling will not operate properly.

Camp-on (Call Waiting)

Description

If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also press the HOLD key to place the first call on hold and then answer the waiting call.

The System provides two types of call waiting:

Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal to the busy extension. You need only to remain on the line.

Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy extension.

You can leave a text message that displays on the busy phone. Any one of the following messages can be selected. Messages 6 to 9 and 0 have no default message text. All the messages can be changed

through system programming. (See “Set Text Message Replies” on page 112 for more information on

setting Send Text Messages).

Table 16. Send Text Messages

Message No.

3

4

1

2

5

Message Text

Visitor Here

Need Help

Important

Urgent

Emergency

Message No.

8

9

6

7

0

Message Text

User Defined

User Defined

User Defined

User Defined

User Defined

The busy party can reply with a text message that displays on the camping on phone. Any one of the following messages can be selected. Messages 6 to 9 and 0 have no default message text. All the

messages can be changed through system programming. (See “Set Text Message Replies” on page

112 for more information on setting Text Message Replies).

Table 17. Text Message Replies

Message No.

3

4

1

2

5

Message Text

Take A Message

Please Hold

Will Call Back

Transfer

Unavailable

Message No.

8

9

6

7

0

Message Text

User Defined

User Defined

User Defined

User Defined

User Defined

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 149

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Operation

To use Automatic Camp-on:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

Section 700 - Operation

Result

Intercom dial tone

Wait XXX displays (where XXX = extension number/name)

• Called party hears alert tone from the speaker.

• Calling party hears ringback tone

3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.

To use Manual Camp-on:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. Enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/

HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indondesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

Wait XXX displays (where XXX = extension number/name)

• Called party hears alert tone from the speaker

• Calling party hears ringback tone

4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.

To leave a text message while camped-on:

Action

1. Press the MSG FF key.

2. Enter the Send Text Message number (1-9, 0). (See Table 16 on page 149 for the send text messages.)

Result

The send text message appears on the busy telephone display.

To reply to a text message:

Action

1. Press the MSG FF key.

2. Enter the Reply Text Message number (1-9, 0). See Table 17 on page 149 for the text message replies.)

Result

The text message reply appears on the camped on telephone display.

150 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:

Action

1. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key again to be connected to the waiting call.

OR....

Press the HOLD key.

Result

• Current call placed on hold

• Connected to waiting call

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “To camp a call onto a busy extension:” on page 143.

• Manual camp-on to a busy extension will not Call Forward/No Answer.

• Automatic camp-on to a busy extension will Call Forward/No Answer.

• Calls transfered to a busy extension will Call Forward.

• Text message send and text message reply requires display Key Telephones. Also, Text Message

Send and Text Message Reply keys must be programmed on the telephones.

Conference Calls

Description

Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time. If the optional Conference Card is installed, up to 8 parties can participate in a conference call.

The Version 3.0 software release allows any combination of extensions and trunk lines to be in the conference as long as the original extension is in the conference and the total number of parties does not exceed 8. With Version 3.0 software, only one operation is used to establish and add to a conference. You simply have to place the current call on hold, dial the next party and press the CONF key. No different operation or access code is required to add additional parties to the call.

When no optional conference card is installed, the system supports the following types of three-party conference calls:

• 3 extensions

• 2 extensions and 1trunk line

• 1 extension and 2 trunk lines

When the optional 8-party conference card is installed, the system supports any combination of conference calls, except all outside lines.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 151

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To establish a conference call:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key or the line key of your current call.

2. If adding an outside party, press a vacant trunk key, or dial a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

3. Dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call.

4. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.

Result

Extension number, outside line number, or name of held party displays

• Outside dial tone

CO #XXX displays (where XXX = line number)

Dialed number displays

CNF1:CO XXX or EXT XXX and

CNF2:CO YYY or EXT YYY displays

(where XXX = first party and YYY = second party)

5. To add additional parties, repeat steps 1-4

6. For 3-party Conference Call Only:

To release a conference member, press PROG + 1 to release conference member 1 or press PROG + 2 to release conference member 2, etc.

(Available up to 3-party conference. Not available for 4-party or more conferencing)

Note: The conference member numbers are shown on the display.

7. To drop out of the conference call, hang up.

(See ** Consideration below)

To establish a two-party private conversation from a 3-party conference:

Action

1. While on a call, press the CONF + 1 (2) to have a private conversation with the CNF 1 (2) party as shown on the display.

2. To reestablish the conference, press CONF.

Result

You and the selected party are in a separate conversation from the other conference parties.

CNF1:CO XXX or EXT XXX and

CNF2:CO YYY or EXT YYY displays

(where XXX = first party and YYY = second party)

152 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

To remove a Busy Tone (Hang up) from an 8-party conference:

Action

1. During an conference with more than 3 parties, press

CONF + (n) (where n is the number 1-7 for the conference parties) to individually select a conference party.

2. If you did not select the conference party that is giving busy tone, re-enter the conference by pressing the CONF key.

3. If you selected the conference party that is giving busy tone, hang up and then go off-hook again and press the CONF key to re-enter the conference call.

Result

The other party is placed on hold.

CONF Members: X (where X = 4-7 party conference) displays

CONF Members: Y (where Y = 4-6 party conference) displays

Hardware Requirements

• A Conference Card (VB-44120) must be installed in the System in order to conference more than three parties.

Considerations

**If all the internal parties hang up, the conference call will be disconnected. If the internal party remains in the conversation, the conference call remains in progress.

• When three parties are conferenced, a built-in 3-party conference circuit is used. If no 3-party conference circuit is available, a conference cannot be established.

• When a fourth party is added, the conference is moved to a conference circuit on the 8-party conference card. If an 8-party conference circuit is not available, a fourth party cannot be added to a conference.

• Once an 8-party conference circuit is used, it continues to be used as long as the conference continues.

• An 8-party conference card supports up to four 8-party conference circuits. However, the card must be placed in cabinet slots 1, 5, or 9 to support more than one 8-party conference circuit (and jumpered accordingly).

Directory Numbers

Description

A Directory Number (DN) allows extension numbers to be used on a key basis. The same DN may be assigned to multiple keys on the same telephone and to keys on other telephones.

When a telephone’s extension number is assigned to a key on the same telephone, it is considered a

Primary Directory Number (PDN). Up to three appearances of the PDN may be assigned to keys on a key telephone. This allows for multiple calls on the same DN.

When a DN is assigned to an FF key on another telephone, it is considered a Non-Primary Directory

Number (NPDN). Up to three NPDN appearances of the same DN may be assigned to keys on a telephone. This allows calls to the DN to appear on multiple telephones. The calls ring in on a specified basis - immediate, delayed, or no-ring.

A telephone may only have one PDN (on up to three keys) but may have multiple NPDNs with up to three appearances of any one NPDN.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 153

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

In Version 4.0 and higher, directory numbers may be assigned to stations that are not installed, provided the cabinet is installed. However, once the directory numbers have been assigned to a particular slot, that slot is no longer available.

Figure 3. Example Directory Number assignments for Extension 200

154

When a caller originates a call, the call appears on the first available PDN key. If all PDNs are unavailable, the call will select the INT LED.

When calls come in to a DN, the call appears on the first available DN key. If the call is to your PDN and no PDN key is available, the call appears on the INT LED.

Directory numbers may be assigned to FF keys 25-32. These are non-appearing keys.

Intercom voice calls only go to the PDN extension but light the corresponding NPDN keys red. A tone call follows the appropriate ring status (immediate ring, delayed ring, etc.) for any extension.

To originate a call using a Primary Directory Number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. If dialling an outside call, dial the outside line group access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

3. Dial the phone number or extension number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

The first available PDN key lights.

• Outside dial tone

CO XXX displays (where XXX = line number)

Dialed number displays

ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

To receive a call to a Directory Number (PDN or NPDN):

Action

1. If ringing, go off-hook or press the green blinking PDN or

NPDN key.

If not ringing, press the red blinking PDN or NPDN key.

Result

The PDN or NPDN key lights.

To originate a call using a Non-Primary Directory Number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the desired NPDN key.

3. If dialling an outside call, dial the outside line group access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

4. Dial the phone number or extension number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

The first available PDN key lights.

Intercom dial tone

The NPDN key lights.

• Outside dial tone

CO XXX displays (where XXX = line number)

Dialed number displays

To receive a call using a Non-Primary Directory Number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the desired NPDN key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

The NPDN key lights.

The call is received.

To call a Primary Directory Number extension (NPDNs not called):

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

The first available PDN key lights.

2. Enter the Direct Call to PDN access code (default = 766

[UK/HK] or 766# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 155

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

To transfer a call to the Primary Directory Number extension (NPDNs not called):

Action

1. Place the current call on hold.

2. Enter the Direct Call to PDN access code (default =766

[UK/HK] or 766# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number.

4. If desired, wait until the PDN Extension answers and introduce the call.

5. Hang up.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Dialed number displays

To set Call Forwarding All, Busy, or No Answer for a PDN from an NPDN or PNPDN:

Version 4.0 and higher

Action

1. Press an NPDN (or PNPDN) key.

2. Dial the access code for Call Forwarding (Direct = 721),

(Busy = 722), (No Answer = 723).

3. Dial the Call Forward Destination extension number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Dialed number displays

Note: FF1-0-03: NPDN and PNPDN Call Forwarding Programming Address

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• A DN can be assigned as a member of a hunt group.

• DNs are not available for ISDN S-Point, pilot numbers of hunting groups, Voice Mail, ACD, API and for the Attendant group.

• A PDN must be assigned to a telephone before a corresponding NPDN can be used.

• TRS Class and ARS Routing is determined on an extension port basis regardless of the DN accessed.

• Busy Override is available to the PDN conversation, but not available to the NPDN conversation.

• Do-Not-Disturb (DND) can only be set through the PDN, but cannot be set through the NPDN.

• Timed Reminder (Alarm Setting) is set through the PDN, but cannot be set through the NPDN.

• Offhook Voice Announce is available to PDN conversation, but not available to the NPDN conversation.

• The appearance of incoming trunk calls have the following priority if the keys are set to the same extension:

• Trunk/Floating Hold Key

• MCO Key

• DN Key

• Non-Appearance

156 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Display Information

Description

Key telephones with a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) reflect the following information:

• Day and time (in 12 or 24 hour format)

• Callback requests from other extensions

• Caller ID information

• Extension number

• Extension calling party name

• Extension called party status

• Trunk call duration

• Trunk number

• Trunk name

Display telephones can also display Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Directories, System Speed Dial (SSD)

Directories, and Extension Directories, along with various other information such as the Set/Cancel status of different features and callback messages from other extensions.

Examples of large- and small-display phones are shown in the following illustrations.

Caller ID Display Information

Prior to Version 4.0, the telephone would not display Caller ID information for an extension that was in use when a call was received. In Version 4.0 or higher, Caller ID information is displayed on the second line of an LCD display when an incoming call is received during conversation. If a second incoming call is from another extension, the LCD displays the extension name or number. If the second incoming call is from an Exchange, the LCD displays the CID information transmitted from the caller. Caller ID displays the second incoming call as follows:

Figure 5-4. Normal Incoming Caller ID Message (Exchange Line/Extension)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 157

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Large-Display Phone

Figure 5. Large-Display Main Menu (shown in default idle condition)

Section 700 - Operation

158

You can easily access and use many telephone features by pressing the soft key next to the desired

Main Menu item. These items include:

Personal Dial

Contains PSD numbers. To scroll through the PSD Directory, press the NEXT or PREV buttons located beneath the display.

• PSD speed dial numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial

directory. For information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialling” on page

192.

System Dial

Contains SSD numbers. To scroll through the SSD Directory, press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display.

• SSD numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial directory. For

information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialling” on page 192.

Extension

Contains the Extension Directory (grouped alphabetically). To scroll through the Extension Directory, press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display.

Function System

Provides easy access to most key telephone features, such as Call Forwarding, Do-Not-Disturb

(DND), Microphone Mute, Background Music, Call Pickup, Account Codes, Message Waiting /

Callback, Headset On/Off, Extension Port confirmation, etc.

To scroll through the list of items, press the NEXT or PREV button located beneath the display.

Function Ext

Allows you to assign frequently used telephone features for easy access. Most items found under

Function System can be assigned to the Function Ext area, in any order you desire. (For additional information, see Section 400 - Programming.)

ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Large-LCD Display During Idle

The large display telephone may optionally be set to return to a selected idle screen after the user goes on-hook. If the Large-LCD Display During Idle setting (FF3 0 BSSC 04 11 HOLD) is set to 1 (allow), after moving to the desired menu is displayed, the user may enter ON/OFF PROG ## ON/OFF to select the menu as the idle menu.

Small-Display Phone

Figure 6. Small-Display Menu (shown in default idle condition)

The Mode key and End key on a small-display phone allow you to change the software mode of the display from Default (i.e., time and date) mode to Directory mode. While in Directory mode, you can view SSD and PSD Directories and Extension Directories. You can dial a speed dial number or extension by pressing the soft key next to the desired number. You can also use the soft keys to execute programmed system features while in the Variable mode.

Notes:

• The MODE key allows you to switch the display from Default to Directory mode. The END key allows you to return the display to Default mode.

• The soft keys allow you to view speed dial and extension directories and to dial a speed dial number or extension while in the Directory mode.

• Speed dial numbers must be programmed before they will appear in the speed dial directory.

For information on programming speed dial numbers, see “Speed Dialling” on page 192.

Variable Mode

Variable Mode allows you to use the soft keys to access programmed features while your phone is in the following states:

• During an intercom call

• During trunk dial tone

• During a trunk call

• After dialling a busy extension

Note:

Variable Mode features required system programming.

Changing the Display Contrast

You can adjust the display contrast by pressing the VOLUME up or down key while the phone is idle.

Do-Not-Disturb

Description

You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.

You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 159

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To set DND for your own extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or

720# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

DND Accepted

To cancel DND for your own extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or

720# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

DND/CD LED light goes off

DND Cleared displays

To set DND for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740

[UK/HK] or 740# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter DND EXT # displays

DND Set displays on affected extension

To cancel DND for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750

[UK/HK] or 750# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter DND EXT # displays

DND Cleared displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

160 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

• Forced DND override is available.

• DND override function is available by Busy Override code.

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

DP to DTMF Signal Conversion

Description

Dial Pulse (DP) to Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Signal Conversion allows you to switch from

DP to DTMF signalling when using a DP trunk. For instance, if you dial into a Voice Mail system using a DP trunk, you can switch to DTMF signalling to communicate with the Voice Mail system.

The System can automatically change DP to DTMF tones based on the incoming and outgoing timers.

Operation

To switch from DP to DTMF dialling:

Action

1. Press the * key or the # key.

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

DSS/72 Console

Description

The DSS/72 console is a 72-key console that can be attached to a key telephone. The 72 keys on the

DSS/72 can be programmed as Direct Station Select (DSS) keys for internal lines.

In addition to providing direct station selection, the DSS keys also provide Busy Lamp Fields (BLFs) that allow you to monitor the status of other extensions. The LED lights red when the assigned extension is busy, and lights green when Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) are activated.

For additional information, see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 163.

Hardware Requirements

• DSS/72 console (VB-D631uk [UK] or VB-44320 [HK, Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 161

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

• Pressing a DSS key while connected to an outside line places the line on hold.

• A maximum of 12 DSS/72 consoles can be connected to a 96-port system.

EM/24 Console

Description

The EM/24 is a 24-key console that can be attached to a key telephone. The 24 keys on the EM/24 can be programmed as Direct Station Select (DSS) keys for internal lines.

In addition to providing direct station selection, the DSS keys also provide Busy Lamp Fields (BLFs) that allow you to monitor the status of other extensions. The LED lights red when the assigned extension is busy and lights green when Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) are activated.

For additional information, see “Flexible Function Keys” on page 163.

Hardware Requirements

• EM/24 console (VB-D631UK [UK] or VB-44320 [HK, Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])

Considerations

• N/A

Flash

Description

You can send a flash signal on your telephone to release an outside line and then either automatically reseize the same outside line or switch to extension dial tone status by pressing the FL/R or PROG key.

Trunk programming determines whether your phone reseizes the outside line or switches to extension dial tone status.

Note:

The following is available for future use only: Alternatively, an extension setting determines if pressing a trunk key will place the call on exclusive hold or send a flash to the trunk.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• You can send a longer or shorter flash signal, depending on whether you use the FL/R or PROG key (flash tone lengths are set for the FL/R and PROG keys through system programming).

162 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Flexible Function Keys

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Description

You can assign frequently used functions to programmable keys on key phones, DSS/72 consoles, and

EM/24 consoles. All keys not already assigned as line or speed dialling keys are available for programming.

You can store either Fixed Feature codes or Flexible Feature codes in an FF key. (The LED of the

Flexible Function [FF] key will not light when digits are stored in the key.) Fixed Feature codes are hard-coded and cannot be changed. Most features; however, can also be assigned flexible codes according to the System Dial Plan. This allows the flexible codes to be changed in the dial plan without having to re-program extensions.

When a flexible code is programmed into an FF key or soft key, the System translates the flexible code into the fixed code. You can use either the Fixed Feature code or your System’s Flexible Feature

code when programming FF keys. Table 18 on page 165 reflects both Fixed Feature codes and the

System defaults for Flexible Feature codes.

Operation

To assign Fixed Feature codes to an FF key:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the FF key to be programmed.

4. Press the FL/R key.

5. Enter the code to be programmed. (See Table 18 on page

165.)

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Repeat steps 2-6 to program additional keys.

8. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

F displays

Enter Function# displays

Programmed code displays

Programmed function name displays

To assign Flexible Feature Codes to an FF key:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the FF key to be programmed.

4. Enter the code to be programmed. (See Table 18 on page

165.)

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Repeat steps 2-5 to program additional keys.

7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

F displays

Enter Function# displays

Programmed code displays

Programmed function name displays

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 163

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

To erase a code stored on an FF key:

Note:

You cannot use the following procedure to clear FF keys that have been assigned as trunks.

Trunk keys can only be cleared through system programming.

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the FF key that was programmed.

4. Press the HOLD key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Programmed code displays

Cleared Function displays

To check a programmed FF key (Display Phone Only):

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the CONF key.

3. Press the FF key to be checked.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

C displays

Programmed data displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• If a new code is programmed into a key, the previously programmed code is erased.

• FF keys assigned as trunks must be cleared using system programming before new FF assignments can be made.

• The System can be programmed so that MCO 1 Trunk Access calls automatically use Automatic

Route Selection (ARS).

• The ANSWER key functions as listed in the table below.

Status Condition Operation when ANSWER key is pressed

Idle No incoming ring

Incoming ring

Ignore.

Monitor ON (speaker) - Auto Answer for incoming ring.

Off-Hook Off-hook signaling Answer for off-hook signaling. Current conversation will be put on hold automatically.

Ignore.

No off-hook signaling

Note: When the extension has 1 non-appearing trunk on hold and 1 non-appearing trunk at talk, ANSWER key operation is ignored and you can’t put the 2nd non-appearing trunk on hold.

164 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

• The RELEASE key functions as listed in the table below.

Status

Idle

Monitor ON

(speaker) or Headset

Mode

Handset Off-Hook

Condition

--

Several held calls

No held calls

Several held calls

No held calls

Operation when RELEASE key is pressed

Ignore.

Latest held call will be transferred; phone returns to idle status (Monitor OFF).

Current call (talk) will be released; phone returns to idle status (Monitor OFF).

Latest held call will be transferred; phone gets internal dial tone.

Current call (talk) will be released; phone gets internal dial tone.

Table 18. Feature access codes for FF key assignments

Note:

TMI is the abbreviation for Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia.

Feature Description

Trunk Key

MCO Key

Virtual Port Key

BLF/DSS Outgoing

BLF/DSS Immediate Ring

BLF Delayed Ring

BLF/DSS-No Ring

2-Way Box for CCU 1

2-Way Box for CCU 2

2-Way Box for CCU 3

2-Way Box for CCU 4

2-Way Box for CCU 5

2-Way Box for CCU 6

2-Way Retrieve Messages

2-Way Access

2-Way End

2-Way Re-Record

2-Way Pause

2-Way Store

2-Way Add

2-Way Cancel

2-Way Notify

2-Way Copy

REDIAL + Fixed Feature

Code + (additional digits to program into key)

# + (Trunk 1-576)

1 + (Auto-Select Pattern 1-5;

MCO-Incoming Trk Grp 00-99)

Γ9 + (Virtual Port 001-576)

9 + (Extension 0-9999)

81 + (Extension 0-9999)

82 + (Extension 0-9999)

83+ (Extension 0-9999)

61 + (box no.)

62 + (box no.)

63 + (box no.)

64 + (box no.)

65 + (box no.)

66 + (box no.)

5 + (box no.)

Γ#50

Γ#51

Γ#52

Γ#53

Γ#54

Γ#55

Γ#56

Γ#57

Γ#58

Default Flexible Feature Code

(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature

Code)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 165

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

166

Feature Description

2-Way MF Send

ACD-1 Log-In/Out Button

ACD-1 Work Unit

ACD-1 Unavailable Button

ACD-2 Log-In/Out Button

ACD-2 Work Unit

ACD-2 Unavailable Button

Speed-Dial Send Button

Designated Trunk Access Button (for outgoing calls)

Γ02

Verified ID Code Send

Γ03

Floating Hold Answer

Call Park Pickup (Ver. 3.0 and higher)

Γ04

Priority Message-Waiting: Send

Priority Message-Waiting: Cancel

Message-Waiting: Cancel

Message-Waiting: Callback

Γ05

Γ06

Γ07

Γ08

REDIAL + Fixed Feature

Code + (additional digits to program into key)

Γ#59

Γ#80

Γ#81 + (Work Unit 00-99)

Γ#82

Γ#85

Γ#86 + (Work Unit 00-99)

Γ#87

Γ01 + (SSD or PSD)

Call Forward (All): Set 70 + (Extension 0-9999)

Call Forward (All): Clear

Call Forward (All): Set from another extension

Call Forward (All): Clear from another extension

Call Forward (No Answer): Set

Call Forward (No Answer): Clear

Call Forward (No Answer): Set from another extension

Call Forward (No Answer): Clear from another extension

Call Forward (Busy): Set

Call Forward (Busy): Clear

Call Forward (Busy): Set from another extension

Call Forward (Busy): Clear from another extension

DND Set/Clear

DND Set from Attendant

Γ09

Γ10

Γ11

71 + (Extension 0-9999)

Γ12

Γ13

Γ14

72 + (Extension 0-9999)

Γ15

Γ16

Γ17

Γ18

Γ19

Default Flexible Feature Code

(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature

Code)

80

88

89

Γ9

Γ41

Γ49

Γ5

Γ6

721 (UK/HK) or 721# (TMIT) +

(Extension 0-9999)

731 (UK/HK) or 731# (TMI) +

(Extension 0-9999)

741 (UK/HK0 or 741# (TMI)

751 (UK/HK) or 751# (TMI)

723 (UK/HK) or 723# (TMI)

+ (Extension 0-9999)

733 (UK/HK) or 733# (TMI)

+ (Extension 0-9999)

743 (UK/HK) or 743# (TMI)

753 (UK/HK) or 753# (TMI)

722 (UK/HK) or 722# (TMI)

+ (Extension 0-9999)

732 (UK/HK) or 732# (TMI)

+ (Extension 0-9999)

742 (UK/HK) or 742# (TMI)

752 (UK/HK) or 752# (TMI)

720 (UK/HK) or 720# (TMI)

740 (UK/HK) or 740# (TMI)

ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Feature Description

REDIAL + Fixed Feature

Code + (additional digits to program into key)

Γ20

DND Clear from Attendant

Call Forward (All/Busy/No-Answer/

DND): Clear (Prior to Ver 3.0)

Call Forward (All/Busy/No-Answer/

DND and Absence Message: Clear

(Version 3.0 and higher)

Γ21

Alarm Set

Alarm Clear

BGM On/Off

Call Pickup Group-designated

(pick up a call in another Pickup

Group)

Γ22

Γ23

Γ24

Day 1/Night Toggle (Prior to Ver 3.0)

Day 1/Day 2/ Night Toggle (Ver 3.0 and higher)

Γ25

Day 2

Night 1

Night 2 (for 2-Way VM)

Paging

Γ26

Γ27

Γ28

Γ29 + (Page Group No.)

Meet-Me Answer

Call Pickup Group-All Calls

Γ30

Γ31

Call Pickup Group-Trunk Calls Only

Γ32

Γ33 + (Call Pickup Grp 1-99)

Direct Call Pickup

Trunk Call Pickup

Headset Mode On/Off

Conference Key

Transfer Key

Program Key

Recall - Flash Key

PSD Name Assignment

Ext. Directory Name Assignment

Speed-Dial Directory Name

Assignment

Γ42

MCO-1 Access (initial setting: 9)

Γ43

MCO-2 Access (initial setting: 81)

Γ44

MCO-3 Access (initial setting: 82)

Γ45

MCO-4 Access (initial setting: 83)

Γ46

MCO-5 Access (initial setting: 84)

Γ47

Callback at Busy Tone

Γ49

Camp-on at Busy Tone

Message-Waiting Set at Busy Tone

Γ50

Γ51

73 + (Extension 0-9999)

Γ34

Γ35

Γ36

Γ37

Γ38

Γ39

Γ40

Γ41

Default Flexible Feature Code

(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature

Code)

750 (UK/HK) or 750# (TMI)

7

ΓΓ

Γ31

Γ39

Γ30

760 (UK/HK) or 760# (TMI)

761 (UK/HK) or 761# (TMI)

762 (UK/HK) or 762# (TMI)

763 (UK/HK) or 763# (TMI)

# + (Zone No.)

##

701 (UK/HK) or 701# (TMI)

702 (UK/HK) or 702# (TMI)

703 (UK/HK) or 703# (TMI)

704 (UK/HK) or 704# (TMI)

*0

9 (UK/HK), 0 (TMI)

81

82

83

84

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 167

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Feature Description

REDIAL + Fixed Feature

Code + (additional digits to program into key)

Default Flexible Feature Code

(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature

Code)

Message-Waiting Priority Set at Busy

Tone

Γ52

Busy Override Set

Voice Call/Tone Call Toggle

Γ53

Γ54

Message-Waiting Set at Ringback

Tone

Γ55

Message-Waiting Priority Set at

Ringback Tone

Account Code Entry

Extension Port Confirm

Trunk Port Confirm

Γ56

Γ57

Γ59

Γ60

74 + (Ext.No. 0-9999)

8#

VM Transfer Key 1

VM Transfer Key 2

Variable Mode

75 + (Ext.No. 0-9999)

Γ61

Call Logging Confirmation Mode

Start

Γ62

Station Call Park Hold/Answer

Station Call Park Hold

Γ63

Γ64

Station Call Park Answer (Own Ext.)

Γ65

Station Call Park Answer (Other Ext.)

Γ66

Station Call Park Transfer

Release Key

Answer Key

OHVA Key

Γ67

Γ68

Γ69

Γ70

Split Key

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Key

ANY Key

Γ71

Γ72

Γ8 + (Up to 4 digits 0 - 9, #, or *)

771 (UK/HK) or 771# (TMI)

772 (UK/HK) or 772# (TMI)

773 (UK/HK) or 773# (TMI)

774 (UK/HK) or 774# (TMI)

Note: The following feature keys were added with Version 3.0

Station Lockout Set (Own Ext.)

Station Lockout Set (Other Ext.)

Γ#01

Γ#02

Station Lockout Cancel (Other Ext.)

Γ#03

Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station

Lockout Security Code Change

Γ#04

Callback Cancellation

Zip Mode On/Off (toggle)

Direct Call to a PDN Ext.

UNA Pickup

Absence Message Code

Γ58

Γ73

Γ74

Γ77

Γ78

Network Flash during Talk on FF-Key

Γ79

746 (UK/HK) or 746# (TMI)

747 (UK/HK) or 747# (TMI)

748 (UK/HK) or 748# (TMI)

749 (UK/HK) or 749# (TMI)

769 (UK/HK) or 769# (TMI)

(Version 3.5 and higher)

766 (UK/HK) or 766# (TMI)

705 (UK/HK) or 705# (TMI)

729 (UK/HK) or 729# (TMI)

767 (UK/HK) or 767# (TMI)

(Version3.5 and higher)

168 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Feature Description

PDN #1 Key

PDN #2 Key

PDN #3 Key

NPDN #1 Key

NPDN #2 Key

NPDN #3 Key

ACD-1 Wrap Key

ACD-2 Wrap Key

Text Message Sent

Text Message Reply

Login Key for CTAPI

REDIAL + Fixed Feature

Code + (additional digits to program into key)

Default Flexible Feature Code

(if not listed, must use Fixed Feature

Code)

01

02

03

01 + (Ext No. 0-9999)

02 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)

03 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)

Γ#83

Γ#88

Γ75 + (Message code no. 0-9)

Γ76 + (Message code no. 0-9)

Γ#90

(Version 3.5 and higher)

(Version 3.5 and higher)

(Version 3.5 and higher)

Note: The following feature keys were added with Version 4.0

Message and Voice Mail Key

Silent Monitor Key

Call Record Key

Room Monitoring Set Key

Room Monitoring Initiate Key

76 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)

77 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)

78 + (Ext. No. 0-9999)

Γ#05

Γ#06

768

775

776

Handsfree Answerback

Description

Handsfree Answerback allows you to answer an intercom call without lifting the handset.

The System must be programmed for Voice Calling for you to use this feature. You must press 1 during a call to switch from Tone Calling to Voice Calling.

Operation

To answer calls using Handsfree Answerback:

Action

1. When the intercom call arrives, confirm that the MIC LED is off.

(If it is lit, press the MIC key to turn it off.)

2. Speak into the microphone to answer.

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 169

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

• Handsfree Answerback can be used to respond to only voice calls from other extensions - not tone calls.

• Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension Class of Service (COS) that allows Voice Calling.

Handsfree Operation

Description

Handsfree Operation allows you to use all available System features without lifting the handset. Any speakerphone can be operated handsfree.

Operation

To initiate Handsfree Operation:

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

Action Result

Phone is offhook with access to full range of calling features

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Headset Operation

Description

Headset Operation allows you to handle calls with a headset instead of with the handset or speakerphone.

Operation

To answer calls using the Headset Operation:

170 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Note:

If Headset mode is already on, the following procedure turns it off. If Headset mode is off, this procedure turns it on.

Action

1. Pick up the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Enter 90 for Headset mode.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• A headset must be installed.

Considerations

• Intercom Dial Tone is enabled/disabled regardless of Headset mode (per programming for the

Extension Class of Service [COS])

Hot Dial Pad

Description

The dial pad on digital key phones can be designated as “hot” on an extension-by-extension basis.

The Hot Dial Pad allows the user to initiate a call without going offhook. Extensions with the Hot

Dial Pad enabled can initiate calls by pressing any of the numeric keys (0-9). The “*” and “#” keys are not hot.

The Dial Pad can be hot under these conditions:

• When the extension is idle

• When the extension is holding a call

• When the extension is receiving a page.

The Dial Pad cannot be hot under these conditions:

• When a call is ringing at the extension (intercom or trunk)

• When the extension is on a call.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

Paging: The Hot Dial Pad cannot be used to initiate a page.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 171

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Hot Line

Description

Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre-assigned extension or speed dial number simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.

Operation

To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Automatically connected to pre-assigned extension or speed dial number

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Intercom Calling

Description

The System provides two methods of intercom calling:

Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.

Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.

Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access code.

Operation

To make a call using Intercom Calling:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

172 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Action

3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to make a voice call, enter 1.

Or, if your extension is set for voice call and you want to make a tone call, enter 1.

4. Speak when your call is answered.

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

• Dallied number displays

INT LED lights

INT LED goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The Handsfree Answerback feature can be used to respond to only voice calls from other extensions - not tone calls.

• Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.

Last Number Redial

Description

Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialled by pressing the FL/R key.

Operation

To automatically redial the last number dialled:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

OR...

Press a vacant trunk key or enter a trunk access code

(default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or

81-84).

2. Press the FL/R key.

3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

• Outside dial tone

CO XXX displays (where XXX = trunk number)

Last number dialled displays

Line key LED turns red, then goes off.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 173

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

• Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both intercom and trunk calls or trunk calls only.

Line Appearances

Description

The System provides three types of line appearances

• Direct Station Select (DSS) / Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Appearances

• Direct In Line (DIL) Appearances

• Multi-Exchange (CO) Line Appearance

DSS/BLF Appearances

When a DSS/BLF key is programmed, it automatically provides one-touch dialling and DSS and BLF for the assigned extension numbers. If desired, the DSS/BLF key can also provide ring or delayed ring monitor. For example, you can set extension A as a DSS/BLF ringing key on extension B. When extension A rings, the LED of the DSS/BLF key on extension B flashes and the phone rings.

Ringing or delayed ringing can be set on extensions which have a BLF key. The LED of the DSS/BLF key flashes green during ringing and the display shows the BLF extension number.

When extension A is in use, the LED of the DSS/BLF key on extension B lights red. If one extension has the Call Forwarding or Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature activated, the DSS/BLF key lights green.

Four DSS/BLF modes are available as follows:

Ring

(Immed.)

Ring

(Delayed)

Voice

Mail

Transfer

No No Yes

DSS/BLF Type

FF Key

Entry

BLF LED

Indication

Extension

Call

Call

Pickup

DSS Only (No

Pick Up/No Ring)

(9 + Ext #)

DSS/BLF

Immediate Ring

(81 + Ext #)

DSS/BLF Delayed

Ring

(82 + Ext #)

DSS/BLF No Ring (83 + Ext #)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Operation

To assign a DSS/BLF key

:

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Action

1. Press the PROG key.

2. Press the FF key to be assigned the DSS/BLF appearance.

Result

174 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Action

3. Press the REDIAL key.

4. Enter the code for the desired DSS/BLF mode as follows:

9+ Ext # ---- DSS Mode Only

81+ Ext # --- DSS/BLF Immediate Ring

82 + Ext # -- DSS/BLF Delayed Ring

83 + Ext # -- DSS/BLF No Ring

5. Press the HOLD key.

To make an intercom call using the DSS/BLF key:

Action

1. Press the flashing DSS/BLF key.

To pick up a call on a DSS/BLF key:

Action

1. Go off-hook or press the flashing DSS/BLF key.

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Result

Result

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• If several calls arrive at a DSS/BLF key, the calls are queued and ring on a first-in, first-out basis.

• If a BLF key has a second call while busy and off- hook signalling is enabled, the BLF key starts blinking. The call can be answered by pressing the BLF key or going on hook and then off hook.

DIL Appearances

DIL keys are used to originate and receive calls over specific trunk numbers (DIL keys can be assigned to any trunk number).

The LED for a DIL key will flash red on an incoming call even if the trunk is set to ring. If another extension answers the call, the LED on the telephone will light solid red.

Operation

Operation

To originate a trunk call...

To place a call on Exclusive Trunk Hold (page 133)...

Action

1. Press an idle DIL key.

2. The key blinks green as the call is made.

1. Press the DIL key.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 175

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To place a call on System Trunk Hold (page 133)...

To transfer a call...

Action

1. Press the HOLD key.

1. Press the HOLD key.

2. Dial the destination extension.

3. Press the PROG key.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

MCO Appearances

Description

You can make and receive trunk calls using an MCO key. Each extension can have up to 5 MCO keys.

An MCO key can be assigned to any of the pooled trunk groups. Pressing the MCO key is the same as dialling the MCO Access Code (usually 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84 by default).

Operation

To originate a trunk call

Operation

To receive a call on an MCO key.

To place a call on Exclusive trunk Hold

To place a call on System Trunk Hold

To transfer a call

Action

Press an idle MCO key.

The key blinks (green) as the call is made.

If ringing line preference is enabled, go off-hook.

If ringing line preference is not enabled, go offhook and press the MCO key with the green flashing LED.

The LED lights solid green.

Press the MCO key.

The key flashes green while the call is held.

Press the HOLD key.

The key flashes green while the call is held.

Press HOLD, dial the destination extension, then press PROG (if on-hook transfer is off) or go onhook.

Considerations

• Press the MCO key that flashes red to answer an outside call.

• If you are already on a call appearing on an MCO key and you press another MCO key, a line on the other MCO key is selected and the first call is dropped.

• If a trunk key is assigned, the trunk key LED will light when that specific trunk is used instead of the MCO key LED.

176 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

• There are five groups of outside lines: (usually 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or

81-84 by default) .

• MCO keys cannot be assigned on the DSS/72 or the EM/24.

• An MCO key must be assigned in programming mode. The MCO key cannot be assigned by the end user with FF key assignments.

Message Key

Description

The System supports the MSG FF key on the VB-44225/VB-D411LDSUK large-display phone. This key provides the following functionality:

Message Wait Callback: If a callback message has been left by another extension, you can press the MSG FF key to place an automatic callback to that extension. If more than one callback message has been received, pressing the MSG FF key performs auto-callback in the order received.

Priority Message Wait Callback (One-Touch Voice Mail Access): You can press the MSG

FF key to automatically access your voice mailbox. The phone will dial your voice mailbox and send access codes (if programmed) for retrieving new messages.

Operation

To automatically call back an extension that left a message or to access Voice Mail:

1. Press the MSG FF key.

Action Result

Automatically call back to extension

OR...

Automatic access to Voice Mail

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The MSG FF key must be assigned first (default =*08).

• The Message lamp lights when a message has been received.

• If more than one callback message has been received, pressing the MSG FF key performs autocallback in the order received.

• The MSG FF key works only when the phone is idle or receiving internal dial tone.

• Auto-callback is always enabled for large display phones.

• Messages are accessed in a first-in, first-out order for Message Wait, except Priority Message

Wait, which is typically sent by Voice Mail.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 177

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Message Waiting/Callback

Description

If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication at that extension, requesting a return call.

Operation

To leave a message waiting indication:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. While the phone is still ringing, or when you hear the busy tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4 [UK/

HK] or 4# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

MSG Accepted displays

Message lamp flashes at called extension

MSG EXT XXX displays (where XXX

= calling extension number) or name of calling extension displays at called extension

To answer a message waiting indication (callback):

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6) or press the MSG FF key if using a large-display phone.

OR...

Press the Flexible Function (FF) Key assigned as a Message

Callback Key (Version 4.0 and higher).

Result

Intercom dial tone

• Telephone automatically dials extension that sent the message waiting indication

Message lamp goes off when your call is answered

To cancel a callback message:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5) or press the MSG FF key if using a large-display phone.

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

MSG Cleared displays

Message lamp goes off

178 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Note:

Message waiting/callback messages may also be cancelled by either the originator or the receiver by calling the other party.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party Voice Mail. See “Voice Mail Integration

(Third Party)” on page 72.

Mute Function

Description

Mute Function allows you to block outgoing audio to the other party while on a call.

With 44-Series phones, audio can be blocked through both the microphone and the handset. (For handset mute, an FF key must first be assigned as a MIC key.)

Operation

To block outgoing audio using the Handset Mute (VB-D4,VB-D6/VB-442XX-Series phones only):

Action

1. During a handset call, press the MIC key.

Result

MIC LED blinks.

Outgoing audio is blocked through phone’s handset

2. To turn Mute off, press the MIC key again.

To block outgoing audio using the Microphone Mute:

Action

1. During a handset call, press the MIC FF key

2. To turn Mute off, press the MIC FF key again.

Result

MIC LED off.

Outgoing audio is blocked through phone’s microphone

MIC LED on.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 179

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

The fixed MIC key works both for handset mute and microphone mute. But only VB-D4,VB-D6/VB-

442XX-Series phones have the fixed MIC key, so others must assign an FF key as a MIC key.

Offhook Monitor

Description

Offhook Monitor lets you put a call on speaker while the handset is offhook. You can still communicate with the other party via the handset, but you will also be able to hear the other party on the phone’s speaker. The other party can only hear what is transmitted through your handset however, because audio is not transmitted through your microphone.

Operation

To put a call on speaker using the Offhook Monitor:

Action

1. During a handset call, press the ON/OFF key.

Result

• Other party is audible through speaker and handset

• Phone’s microphone is mute

2. To take a caller off speaker (disable Offhook Monitor) but continue the call via the handset, press the ON/OFF key.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Offhook Monitor is available on 44-Series phones only.

• Offhook Monitor can be disabled system-wide.

Offhook Signalling

Description

Offhook Signalling sends a tone to a busy extension to indicate that another trunk call has arrived or a call is camped-on.

180 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Operation

After receiving an offhook signal during a call:

Action

1. Press the HOLD key.

2. Press the flashing FF key for the trunk of the incoming call.

First call on hold

Result

Note:

For details about handling multiple calls, see “Call Hold” on page 133.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The trunk call type may be multiple ring, direct, BLF Ring, or camp-on.

• The System does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:

• During a conference call

• During an OHVA or Busy override

• Data Privacy is enabled

• The receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.

Offhook Voice Announce

Description

You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice

Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement that only the called party can hear. You can also transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the announcement using this feature. The called party may optionally reply to (answer) an OHVA call.

Beginning with CPC Version 3.0, the busy party can reply to an offhook announcement with a text message that displays on the announcing phone. Any one of the following messages can be selected.

Messages 6 to 9 and 0 have no default message text. All the messages can be changed through system

programming. (See “Set Text Message Replies” on page 112 for more information on setting Text

Message Replies).

Prior to the release of Version 4.5, it was not possible for a caller to activate the OHVA feature when a call was placed to an available second or third Directory Number (DN) key. Beginning with Version

4.5, the calling party can activate the OHVA feature even when the second and/or third DN key is available. Depending on how this feature has been programmed, the calling party hears one of three different tones. Ring-Back Tone or Special Tone is heard when a call is placed to a “non-Voice Mail assigned” extension. When a call is placed to a “Voice Mail assigned” number, Ring-Back Tone or

Busy Tone may be heard.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 181

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Table 19. Text Message Replies

Message No.

3

4

1

2

5

Message Text

Take A Message

Please Hold

Will Call Back

Transfer

Unavailable

Operation

To make an OHVA :

Message No.

8

9

6

7

0

Message Text

User Defined

User Defined

User Defined

User Defined

User Defined

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. Enter the OHVA feature access code (default = 8 [UK/HK] or 8# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Busy signal

OHVA EXT XXX displays if busy extension called (where XXX = calling extension.

INT LED flashes

4. Make your announcement

To answer an OHVA:

Action

1. Press the OHVA Split key.

Note: You must program an FF key as a split key (default =

*71) to use this feature.

2. To return to the previous call, press the Split key again.

Result

Split key flashes red

The OHVA originating party receives

Busy signal.

To transfer a call using OHVA:

Action

1. Press the HOLD key to put the current call on hold.

2. Dial the extension number to which the call is being transferred.

Result

Current call on hold

Busy signal

182 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Action

3. Enter OHVA feature access code (default = 8 [UK/HK] or

8# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) and announce the call to be transferred.

4. If transfer is:

• Not accepted, retrieve the call by pressing the associated flashing MCO key (if an appearing call) or by pressing the HOLD key (if a non appearing call).

• Accepted, and On-hook Transfer is enabled for your extension, replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

If On-hook Transfer is not enabled for your extension, press the PROG key (or RELEASE key if using DSS/

72).

Result

To reply to off-hook voice announcement with a text message:

Action

1. Press the MSG FF key.

2. Enter the Reply Text Message number (1-9, 0). See Table 19 on page 182 for the text message replies.)

Result

The text message reply appears on the camped on telephone display.

To answer a call after it has been announced using the OHVA:

Action

1. Replace the handset.

2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Your extension rings

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the OHVA hangs up.

• If the transferred call is not answered immediately, it will queue for a set time limit, then return to the extension sending the OHVA by transfer recall timer.

• You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.

• If a Split key is assigned to the extension that receives an OHVA call, when an OHVA is being received, the Split key blinks green. If the split key is pressed during an OHVA call to answer, the Split key lights red. If the split key is pressed again to terminate the OHVA conversation, the

Split key extinguishes.

• If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.

• Text message reply requires Display Key Telephones. Also, a Text Message Reply key must be programmed on the replying telephone.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 183

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

One-Touch Keys

Section 700 - Operation

Description

You can use one-touch keys to store telephone numbers, speed dial numbers, or feature access codes.

To dial the stored number, you go offhook and press the desired key.

Operation

To program a one-touch key for outside telephone numbers:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.

4. Dial the phone number to be stored.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To assign an System Speed Dial (SSD) numbers to a one-touch key:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.

4. Press the MEMORY key.

5. Enter the SSD bin number to be programmed.

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

184

To chain 2 to 6 SSD numbers to a single one-touch key:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.

4. Press the MEMORY key.

5. Enter the SSD bin number that contains the first part of the number to be dialled.

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

To check a programmed one-touch key:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the CONF key.

3. Press the one-touch key to be checked.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Action

6. If a pause is required, press the FL/R key

Result

• Pause occurs between access code and telephone number

R displays

7. Repeat steps 4-5 (up to 5 more times) for each additional speed dial number to be chained.

8. Press the HOLD key.

9. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

To assign a feature code or extension number to a one-touch key:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.

4. If the System is set for MCO Code level, press the following keys MEMORY * #. Otherwise, proceed to step 5.

5. Enter the desired feature code or extension number.

6. Press the HOLD key.

7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Result

Intercom dial tone

C displays

Programmed data displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• One-touch keys 1-10 are the same as Personal Speed Dial (PSDs) numbers 80-89.

Onhook Dialling

Description

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 185

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Onhook Dialling is a standard feature for key telephones where you can dial onhook using the dialpad, one-touch keys, or FF keys.

Operation

To dial onhook:

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the phone number.

Action Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Paging

Description

The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of an external paging system connected to the System.

Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.

Operation

To make a page:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).

3. Enter the number of the desired paging group (0-9).

4. Make your announcement.

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

186 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Meet-Me Answer

To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Result

Intercom dial tone

Connected to specified party

Hardware Requirements

• External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.

Considerations

• You can assign the paging access code to a one-touch or FF key. Beginning with Version 4.5 and higher, the assigned FF key LED indicates whether the paging system is in use. If the paging system is not in use when a page is originated, the FF key LED lights solid green on the originator’s telephone. If someone in the paging group initiates a page, assigned FF key LEDs on all other telephones will light solid red until the page has been terminated.

• If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to paging groups 0-9 through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.

• An extension can belong to more than one paging group.

• Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal unless your system allows Paging Override.

• Beginning with Version 4.5 and higher, the paging system can be set to “timeout” if a page is longer than a specified length of time (0 to 255 seconds). If this feature is set and the timeout period has elapsed, the page originator’s handset will emit a Fast Busy Tone and the words

“Paging Time Out” will be displayed on the originating telephone’s display.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 187

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Ringing Line Preference

Description

Ringing Line Preference enables an extension to answer a ringing call by simply picking up the handset or pressing the ON/OFF key.

Operation

To answer a call using Ringing Line Preference:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• If disabled in Extension Programming, you must press the line key or enter the feature code for incoming pick-up in order to answer a call.

Room Monitoring

Version 4.0 and higher

Description

This feature allows the user to monitor the sounds in a room from another extension or room. The transmitter in the telephone handset is used as a remote “microphone” for monitoring these sounds.

To activate this feature, the monitored extension must enable the Room Monitor feature before the monitoring extension can listen to the sounds in the room. The monitored extension can be enabled using a SLT, DSLT, or Key Telephone. No special programming is required to allow an extension to enable the monitored mode.

Operation

To set up the monitored extension:

Action

1. Dial the monitored extension access code (default 775),

OR...

Note: The handset must be off-hook to activate the

Room Monitor feature.

Press an FF key assigned with the monitored access code

Result

You will hear a confirmation tone after the monitored extension has enabled the

Room Monitor feature. (If the monitored extension has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)

188 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Additional operations may be performed from the monitored extension when it is in monitored mode:

Action

1. Placing the handset back on-hook or pressing ON/OFF

2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, PROG, CONF, MIC, MENU,

PREV, NEXT, REDIAL, MEMORY, FF Key

3. FL/R

Result

Monitored mode is cancelled. Extension returns to idle.

No response is given. Extension remains in monitored mode.

Monitored mode is cancelled. Dial tone is returned to handset.

Note: When a monitored extension receives a call, the caller hears a busy tone.

To set up the monitoring extension:

Action

1. Dial the monitoring extension access code (default 776) and the extension number of the monitored extension, OR...

Press an FF key assigned the monitored access code and the extension number of the monitored extension, OR...

While the handset is on-hook, press an FF key assigned to the Room Monitor followed by the monitored extension number.

Result

The monitoring extension enters the monitoring mode. (If the monitored extension has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)

The monitoring extension will automatically enter the monitoring mode.

The monitoring operation can be allowed or denied by extension COS and is controlled by the Busy

Override feature. If Busy Override is denied and the user attempts to monitor an extension, the user will hear a fast busy tone.

Additional operations may be performed from the monitoring extension when it is in monitoring mode:

Action

1. Placing the handset back On Hook or pressing ON/OFF

2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, PROG, CONF, MIC, MENU,

PREV, NEXT, FL/R, REDIAL, MEMORY, FF Key

3. LINE

Result

Monitoring mode is cancelled. Extension returns to idle.

No response is given. Extension remains in monitoring mode.

Monitoring mode is cancelled. Dial tone is returned to handset.

Services available on the monitoring extension while the Room Monitoring feature is active:

• Camp On

• Call Back

• Message displayed on LCD when extension is busy

• Message Waiting On/Off

• Cancellation of DND and Call Forwarding by another extension

• Busy Transfer

• DIL Incoming Call (Queuing)

Services NOT available to either the monitored or monitoring extension when this feature is active:

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 189

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

• Busy Override

• On-Hook VA

• The ability to receive a text message

• Silent Monitor

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Allow/deny Busy Override Send—Monitoring extension)

• FF1-2-02: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 1

• FF1-2-03: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 2

Considerations

• If the monitored extension is placed on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitoring extension will hear a fast busy tone.

• If the monitoring extension goes on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitored extension will remain in the monitored mode, and can be accessed by any other extension allowed to access the room monitoring mode.

• A room cannot be monitored from more than one extension at a time. If an attempt is made to monitor an extension while the extension is being monitored, the user will hear a fast busy tone.

• ISDN (s-point) extensions cannot access the Room Monitor feature in either the monitor or monitored modes.

• A monitoring extension cannot forward a call on hold to a monitored extension.

• A monitored extension cannot receive a transferred call.

• If DND is enabled on either the monitoring or monitored extension, DND status is displayed on the calling extension’s telephone.

• If the monitoring or monitored extension has an absence message set, the absence message will be displayed on the calling extension’s telephone.

Silent Monitor

Version 4.0 and higher

Description

The Silent Monitor feature allows an ACD supervisor to monitor a call between an ACD agent and a caller without the knowledge of either party. (See CAUTION, above.) If necessary, the ACD supervisor can initiate a three-way call by barging into the call.

190 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Operation

To initiate Silent Monitor:

Action

1. Press ON/OFF + 768 + Extension number you want to monitor

OR...

Press the FF key assigned as a Silent Monitor Key + Extension number you want to monitor*

OR...

Press only the Silent Monitor Key if the FF key has been preprogrammed to monitor a specific extension number.

You do not need to enter the extension number.

Result

The Silent Monitor feature is active, and the extension is being monitored. (The

Silent Monitor key flashes green when

Silent Monitor is active.)

Note: The Silent Monitor key is disabled when the extension assigned to that key is idle, dialing, or ringing.

Silent Monitor Key Color Definitions

FF Key Color

Clear

Solid Red

Flashing Green

Definition

Cannot monitor

Able to monitor

Not monitoring

Possible Operation

None

Press Silent Monitor key

On-Hook or CONF

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Silent Monitor Initiate (0 = allow, 1 = deny, default = 1)

• FF1-0-03: Silent Monitor Receive (0 = allow, 1 = deny, default = 1)

Considerations

• Be sure all phones that should NOT be allowed to monitor have a COS that restricts monitoring.

• Silent Monitor is allowed or denied by setting the appropriate extension COS.

• Only one supervisor can initiate Silent Monitor on an individual extension at any given time.

• Display telephones can initiate Silent Monitoring. SLTs cannot initiate Silent Monitoring.

• Display telephones and SLTs can be monitored.

• A supervisor cannot initiate Silent Monitoring on an extension when that extension is on a conference call.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 191

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Speed Dialling

Description

The System supports the following speed dial features:

• Personal Speed Dial (PSD)

• System Speed Dial (SSD)

• Speed Dial Linking

• Speed Dial Name Assignment

Personal Speed Dial

You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored in PSD bins numbered 80-99.

You can assign up to 10 PSD numbers to the one-touch keys on a non-display or small-display phone, and up to 20 PSD numbers to the soft keys on a large-display phone. Once the PSD numbers have

been assigned, you dial them by pressing the appropriate key. (For additional information, see “One-

Touch Keys” on page 184.)

You can also enter a name up to 7 characters for each of the PSD numbers. This allows PSD numbers to be confirmed by name rather than by number.

Operation

To assign PSD numbers:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. (A) Press the PROG key.

(B) Press the MEMORY key.

OR...

(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710

[UK/HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

4. Dial the phone number.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter Spd Dial displays

Stored Spd Dial displays

192

To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. If necessary, access an outside line.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Outside dial tone

ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Action

3. Press the MEMORY key.

OR...

Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).

4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

To check a PSD number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the CONF key.

3. Press the MEMORY key.

4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

5. If you want to check the next PSD number, press the HOLD key.

6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

C displays

Programmed data displays

To delete a PSD number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. (A) Press the PROG key.

(B) Press the MEMORY key.

OR...

(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710

[UK/HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Cleared Spd Dial displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

PSD number can be dialled from One-Touch keys. (For additional information, see “One-Touch

Keys” on page 184.)

• Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.

• If the called party’s number and name are stored in the PSD code, that information appears on the display when you use the speed dial code.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 193

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

• Speed dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters. The following table reflects which keys to use.

To indicate. . .

Digit or character

Intercom Level *

MCO Code 9 (UK/HK), 0

(Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)

**

MCO Code 81**

MCO Code 82**

MCO Code 83**

MCO Code 84**

Pause

DP - DTMF Code

SSD Code

Enter/Press

0, 1 - 9, *, #

MEMORY * #

MEMORY * 0

MEMORY * 71

MEMORY * 72

MEMORY * 73

MEMORY * 74

FL/R

MEMORY * *

MEMORY

NN(N)

PROG

MEMORY * 2

no no no no no no no

Shown on Display?

yes (unless preceded by MEMORY * 2 - see below) no no

Hyphen (-)

Display Number (Start / Stop)

***

DTMF Conversion After the

Other Party Answers

MEMORY * 3

(Version 3.5 and higher)

-

* Indicates that the digits that follow are either a feature access code or an extension number. (Not needed if your System is set for Intercom Level.) See Note below.

** Indicates that the digits that follow are for an outside number and the System should seize the next available trunk when dialling. (Not needed if your System is set for trunk level.) See Note below.

*** Indicates that the enclosed digits should not be displayed during dialling. Must precede and follow the digits that you do not want displayed. Example: MEMORY *2 555-

4143 MEMORY *2.

Note:

The System has two levels - Trunk Level and Intercom Level. If set at Trunk Level

(default), you must enter the code for Intercom Level when programming a feature access code or extension number for speed dialling. If the System is set at Intercom Level, you must enter the

MCO Code when programming an outside number for speed dialling.

System Speed Dial

You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins

000-799.

194 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To assign SSD numbers:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. (A) Press the PROG key.

(B) Press the MEMORY key.

OR...

(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710

[UK/HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

4. Dial the phone number.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter Spd Dial displays

Stored Spd Dial displays

To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. If necessary, access an outside line.

3. Press the MEMORY key.

OR...

Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).

4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Outside dial tone

A displays

To check an SSD number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the CONF key.

3. Press the MEMORY key.

4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

5. If you want to check the next SSD number, press the HOLD key.

6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

C displays

Programmed data displays

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 195

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

To delete an SSD number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. (A) Press the PROG key.

(B) Press the MEMORY key.

OR...

(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710

[UK/HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Section 700 - Operation

Result

Intercom dial tone

Cleared Spd Dial displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• If numbers do not appear on the display when you use SSD codes (00-79 or 000-799), your extension is not programmed to display that data.

• The System can be programmed to allow SSD numbers to override toll restrictions.

Speed Dial Linking

You can automatically link together up to 6 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers longer than 24 characters. You can then dial the entire number by pressing the programmed PSD key or by entering the speed dial bin number.

Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier access codes, etc.

Note:

Before linking multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin, the SSD bins must already have been programmed with the appropriate speed dial information.

Operation

To link multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin:

Action

1. Determine the SSD bin numbers to be linked

2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

3. (A) Press the PROG key.

(B) Press the MEMORY key.

OR...

(A) Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710

[UK/HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

196 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Action

4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-90).

5. Press the MEMORY key.

6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799) that contains the first part of the number to be dialled.

7. Repeat steps 5-6 up to 5 more times for all additional SSDs to be dialled.

8. Press the HOLD key when finished.

Result

Enter Spd Dial displays

Stored PSDXXX displays

To use a PSD Key that links multiple SSDs:

Action

1. If necessary, select the trunk group (9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84). (Normally the trunk is selected by the speed dial numbers.)

2. Press the PSD key.

Result

To manually link speed dial keys together:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. If necessary, access an outside line.

3. If you are using a PSD number, press the one-touch key for the first part of the number.

If you are using an SSD number, press the MEMORY key, then enter the SSD bin number.

4. Use the one-touch keys or press the MEMORY key and enter the SSD codes to dial the parts of the phone number until it is completed.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Speed Dial Name Assignments

You can assign names to PSD numbers from a key telephone without entering the programming mode. If allowed in the Extension Class of Service (COS), you can also assign names to SSD numbers.

(PSD names can contain a maximum of 7 characters. SSD names can contain a maximum of 16 characters.)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 197

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

PSD Names:

To set PSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the * key.

4. Enter 0 for the PSD Name Assignment mode.

Result

5. Press the up or down arrow key to display the desired PSD bin number.

6. Enter the extension name:

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

199.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 200.)

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear any existing data

7. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 199.

• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 200.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

8. Repeat steps 6-7 as many times as necessary to enter the desired PSD name.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

9. Press the HOLD key when finished.

10. To enter another speed dial name repeat steps 5-9.

A B C D E F P80 displays (where P80 =

PSD bin 80)

A B C D E F PXX displays (where PXX

= desired PSD bin number)

Next PSD bin number displays

SSD Names:

To set SSD names using a large-display or small-display phone:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Press the * key.

4. Enter 1 for the SSD Name Assignment mode.

SSD NO.=>

Result

198 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Action

5. Enter the speed dial bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

6. Press the HOLD key.

Result

7. Press the FL/R key to clear the current data.

-SSDXXX

A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX

= specified SSD bin number)

A B C D E F XXX displays (where XXX

= specified SSD bin number)

8. Enter the speed dial name:

• If using a large-display phone, press the soft key next to the desired row of letters. (See Example 1 on page

199.)

• If using a small-display phone press the appropriate

one-touch key. (See Example 2 on page 200.)

9. Use the bottom row of FF keys to select a single letter.

• See “Example 1. Large-display phone” on page 199.

• See “Example 2. Small-display phone” on page 200.

Notes:

• Press the * key to erase a single entry.

• Press the # key to enter a space.

10. Repeat steps 8-9 as many times as necessary to enter the desired SSD name.

Note: Press the FL/R key to clear the entire entry.

11. Press the HOLD key when finished.

12. To enter another speed dial name, press the CONF key and repeat steps 5-11.

Next SSD bin number displays

SSD NO.=>

Example 1. Large-Display Phone

To enter D: a. Press the first soft key on the top left.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 199

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.

Section 700 - Operation

To enter o: a. Press the third soft key from the top right.

b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.

200

Example 2. Small-Display Phone

ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Refer to the following diagram to determine which one-touch key to press. (See step 7-8 above.) a b c d e f

A B C D E F g h i j k l

G H I J K L m n o p q r

M N O P Q R s t u v w x

S T U V W X y z : & / sp

Y Z . , ’ -

To enter D: a. Press the first one-touch key from the left on the bottom row.

b. Press the fourth FF key from the left on the bottom row.

a. Press the third one-touch key from the left on the top row.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 201

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features b. Press the third FF key from the left on the bottom row.

Section 700 - Operation

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The ability to assign SSD names is allowed/restricted to anyone with a COS that allows access to

User Maintenance features. (See Chapter 4 “User Maintenance” of this document.)

Station Lockout

Version 3.0 and higher

Description

Use the Station Lockout feature to limit use of your phone by others when you are away from your telephone. When the Station Lockout feature is in use, the TRS (Call Barring) Class of your telephone is changed. Anyone using your telephone is limited to the calling abilities defined by this Lockout

TRS (Call Barring) Class.

In addition, with the appropriate COS, you can set or cancel Station Lockout for other telephones.

202 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Operation

To activate Station Lockout feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the Station Lockout feature code (default = 746 [UK/

HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

St. Lock Set displays

Lock displays

To cancel Station Lockout feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel feature code (default =

746 [UK/HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) .

3. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter ID Code displays

Cleared St. Lock displays

The telephone display returns to the normal display.

To activate Station Lockout feature for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Station Lockout Set for another extension feature code (default = 747 [UK/HK] or 747# [Taiwan, Malaysia,

Indonesia].

3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter Lock EXT # displays

St. Lock Set displays

To cancel Station Lockout feature for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel for another extension feature code (default = 748 [UK/HK] or 748# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])

3. Enter the extension number to activate station lockout.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter Lock EXT #displays

Enter ID Code displays

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 203

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Action

4. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Cleared St. Lock displays

The telephone display returns to the normal display.

To change the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout

Security Code Change code (default = 749 [UK/HK] or

749# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the current Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

4. Enter the new Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter Old ID displays

Enter New ID displays

Stored ID Code displays

The telephone display returns to the normal display.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Walking TRS (Call Barring) and Station Lockout use the same security code.

• You cannot override station lockout using Walking TRS (Call Barring) feature.

• If you enter an incorrect key code and then try to dial, the phone will issue a busy tone.

• If station lockout is set, the phone is limited to the Station Lockout TRS (Call Barring) Class outside calling abilities. This TRS (Call Barring) Class should be carefully selected to only allow the desired call types.

• Without Walking TRS (Call Barring) /Station Lockout Security Code, you cannot set the Station

Lockout feature.

Step Call (Reset Call)

Description

If you dial a busy extension, the system allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply pressing the last digit of the new extension number.

204 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Operation

To use Step Call (Reset Call) to dial another extension (after a busy extension):

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial an extension.

3. When you hear a busy tone, dial the last digit of another extension.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Example: You dial Extension 213, but it is busy. To dial Extension 214, press 4.

Considerations

• The second extension called using the Step Call (Reset Call) feature must have the same number of digits as the first extension.

• If you program to set step call, following feature are not available.

• Camp-on (EXT. No +

2

[UK/HK] or

2#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indondesia])

• Call Back Request (EXT. No +

3

[UK/HK] or

3#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])

• Message Wait (EXT. No +

4

[UK/HK] or

4#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], EXT. No

+

5

[UK/HK] or

5#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])

• Intercom Busy Override (EXT. No +

9

[UK/HK] or

9#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia])

Timed Reminder Call

Description

Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.

Operation

To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).

3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.

(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1

AM, 1300 for 1 PM).

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Enter Alarm hhmm displays

Alarm HH:MM displays (where HH = hour and MM = minutes)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 205

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Section 700 - Operation

Result

Intercom dial tone

Time display disappears

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• An alarm tone (default = 16 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.

• An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.

• To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.

• If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3 minutes later.

Trunk Access

Description

The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside code:

• Trunk Access

• Direct Trunk Access

• MCO Line Preference

• MCO Trunk Access

Trunk Key Access

You can access an outside line by pressing a trunk key.

Operation

To access an outside line:

1. Press a vacant trunk key.

Action

2. Dial the phone number

Result

• Outside dial tone

CO XXX displays (where XXX = line number)

Dialled phone number displays

206 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Direct Trunk Access

Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access to test trunks or to access data trunks.

Operation

To use Direct Trunk Access:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Direct Trunk Access code (default = 88).

3. Enter the desired trunk number.

4. Dial the phone number.

Result

Dialled number displays

• Outside dial tone

CO XXX displays (where XXX = line number)

Dialled phone number displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

MCO Line Preference

MCO Line Preference allows you to place an outside call by simply picking up the handset. When you go offhook, the MCO 1 trunk group is automatically accessed.

Operation

To place a call using MCO Line Preference:

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the phone number.

Action Result

• Outside dial tone

CO XXX displays (where XXX = trunk number)

Dialled phone number displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 207

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

• You can press the ON/OFF key to get intercom dial tone.

MCO Trunk Access

The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle trunk from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code.

Operation

To seize an idle trunk:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Trunk Access Number (default = 9 [UK/HK, 0

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84). (See Table 20.)

3. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

• Outside dial tone

CO XXX displays (where XXX = trunk number)

Dialled phone number displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-CCU configuration. These lines can be divided into 99 different trunk groups.

• Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines.

• Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes. System defaults for MCO trunk access codes are displayed in the following table.

• MCO1 can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature.

• MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.

Table 20. MCO Trunk Access Codes

MCO Group

MCO1

MCO2

MCO3

MCO4

MCO5

Trunk Access Code

9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia)

81

82

83

84

208 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Trunk Queuing

Description

When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter

9

[UK/HK] or

0

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) and all outside lines in a trunk group are busy, the System can call you when a line becomes free. Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings.

Operation

To set Trunk Queuing:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or

3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Press the ON/OFF key.

5. Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

Wait CBK-TRK

displays

To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

• Outside dial tone

CO XXX displays (where XXX = line number

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be cancelled.

• The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make a call using the MCO Trunk Access feature.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 209

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Universal Night Answer to Page

Description

During night mode, Universal Night Answer (UNA) sends incoming calls for selected trunks to ring external paging speakers. Universal Night Answer calls can be picked up from any extension, provided the extension’s Class of Service (COS) allows UNA answer. Beginning with Version 4.5 and higher, this feature can be programmed so that incoming calls ring on both external paging speakers and at extensions with CO/MCO appearances on FF keys (Key Telephones only).

Operation

To answer a UNA call:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the UNA to Page Pickup code (default = 705 [UK/

HK] or 705# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call is received.

To answer a UNA call using the assigned FF key:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the assigned FF (UNA) key

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call is received.

Hardware Requirements

• External paging speakers and associated equipment are not provided with the ICX; they must be purchased separately.

Considerations

• The UNA ringing port can be specified by the caller’s tenant group or by the trunk ring assignment.

Variable Mode

Description

Variable Mode allows you to use the soft keys on a display phone to access selected features when your phone is in the following state:

• While receiving intercom Dial Tone or during dialling - up to 10 functions

• While receiving intercom ringback tone - up to 5 functions

• While receiving intercom busy tone - up to 10 functions

210 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

• While talking in intercom mode, during trunk seizure, or during trunk talk - up to 5 functions

Each extension may have customized soft key features available. The customization must be programmed by the dealer.

To access the feature beside the soft key, simply press the associated soft key.

Operation

To enable Variable Mode:

Action

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the Variable Mode FF key

3. Press the ON/OFF key.

Result

AUTO FNC Mode displays

Programmed features display

To Execute a Variable Mode Function:

Action

1. Press the NEXT or PREV keys on the large display telephone or the up or down arrow keys on the small display telephones until the desired function appears

2. Press the soft key next to the desired function

Result

The variable mode function executes

To cancel Variable Mode:

Action

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the Variable Mode FF key.

3. Press the ON/OFF key again.

Result

AUTO FNC Mode displays

To assign Variable Mode Functions to a Small Display Telephone

Action

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press PROG + 95 + (XX) + Fixed Feature Code (see

Table 18 on page 165).

OR...

Press PROG + 95 + (XX) + FL/R + Flexible Feature

Code (see Table 18 on page 165).

(where XX is the Flexible Screen position as listed below).

3. Press the ON/OFF key

Result

The variable mode function executes

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 211

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

To assign Variable Mode Functions to a Large Display Telephone

Action

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

2. Using the FUNCTION EXT menu, display the desired extension function location (see Flexible Screen Positions below)

3. Press PROG + soft key + Fixed Feature Code (see Table

18 on page 165).

OR...

Press PROG + 95 + (XX) + FL/R + Flexible Feature

Code (see Table 18 on page 165).

4. Press the ON/OFF key

Result

Flexible Screen Positions

Variable Mode Display

Position

Position 1 to 10

Position 11 to 15

Position 16 to 25

Position 26 to 30

Displays at

Intercom Dial Tone/Intercom Dial

Intercom Ringback Tone

Intercom Busy Tone

Talk

Hardware Requirements

• A 44-Series Display Telephone or the VB-3411LDS Large Display Telephone

Considerations

• The small display telephone will exit Variable Mode after a Variable Mode function is executed.

• The large display telephone will stay in Variable Mode after a function is executed.

Voice Recognition

Description

Voice Recognition allows you to dial another extension or a speed dial number using verbal commands. You can also quickly access various telephone features by voice.

Hardware Requirements

• VB-D411DSVUK/VB-44224 12 Key Telephone required

• VB-44101 Voice Recognition Adaptor required.

212 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Considerations

• You must pre-program the desired calling information into the telephone’s Voice Recognition

Unit in order for the System to recognize the verbal commands.

Volume Control

Description

The System allows you to set different receiving volumes for the handset, speaker, intercom ring tone, and incoming ring tone.

Operation

To adjust the volume while your phone is in use:

Action

1. Press the VOLUME up or down key:

• During ringing to adjust intercom or incoming ring tone

• During a call to adjust handset or speaker volume

Result

Intercom dial tone

To adjust ringer volume while your phone is idle:

Action

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key.

3. Enter 9, then 1 to adjust the incoming ring tone.

OR...

Enter 9, then 2 to adjust the intercom ring tone.

4. Press the VOLUME up or down key to adjust the loudness of the tone.

5. Press the ON/OFF key.

Pseudo ring tone

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Extension programming determines whether or not you can set separate volume levels for trunk incoming ring tone and intercom ring tone.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 213

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service

Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Class of Service (COS) allows an extension user to “carry” his or her toll restrictions to another phone.

Before the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS feature can be used, a Walking COS code must be entered at your extension before using dialling privileges at another extension.

Operation

To use a Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension other than your own.

2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring) access feature code

(default = 87).

3. Dial your extension number.

4. Enter your Walking COS code (0001-9999)

5. Enter an trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84)

6. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS remains in effect until you replace the handset.

7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The same Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code can be used on more than one extension.

• Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.

• ARS and TRS (Call Barring) dialling privileges follow the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS.

• Before entering a new Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code, you must first clear the existing code.

• When Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension number) appears in Call Logging.

214 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features

Zip Mode

3.5 and higher

Zip mode automatically answers calls when operating a Key Telephone in headset mode.

Operation

To enter or cancel Zip Mode:

Result Action

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

2. Press the PROG key and dial 80.

OR...

Press the ZIP key.

3. Press the ON/OFF key.

When entering Zip mode, ZIP Mode On displays

When cancelling Zip mode, ZIP Mode

Off displays

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Call forward takes precedence over zip mode.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 215

Chapter 5. Key Telephone Features Section 700 - Operation

216 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Chapter 6. DSLT Features

This chapter describes features that are available with the Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT).

This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic

Digital Single Line Telephone

Absence Message

Account Codes

Non-Verified Account Codes

Verified Account Codes

Attendant Group Calls

Auto Repeat Dial

Background Music

Busy Override

Callback Request

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding-All Calls

Call Forwarding - Busy

Call Forwarding - No Answer

To cancel Call Forwarding and DND:

Call Hold

System Hold

Floating Hold

Exclusive Hold

Broker’s Hold

Call Park

Call Pickup

Extension Group Pickup

Extension Direct Pickup

Trunk Group Pickup

Trunk Direct Pickup

Call Transfer

Supervised Transfer

Unsupervised Transfer

Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension

Camp-On (Call Waiting)

Conference Calls

Do-Not-Disturb

Page

237

237

238

239

239

239

240

241

242

244

234

236

236

236

231

231

232

233

227

228

229

231

225

225

226

227

219

219

221

222

222

223

224

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 217

Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Topic

DP to DTMF Signal Conversion

Flash

Hot Line

Intercom Calling

Last Number Redial

Message Waiting/Callback

Offhook Signalling

Offhook Voice Announce

Onhook Dialling

Paging

Meet-Me Answer

Room Monitoring

Speed Dialling

Personal Speed Dial

System Speed Dial

Speed Dial Linking

Step Call (Reset Call)

Station Lockout

Timed Reminder Call

Trunk Access

Direct Trunk Access

MCO Trunk Access

Trunk Queuing

Universal Night Answer to Page

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service

Page

255

255

257

258

251

251

252

252

247

248

249

250

245

246

246

247

263

264

265

265

266

255

260

262

263

Section 700 - Operation

218 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Digital Single Line Telephone

Figure 7 illustrates the Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT). For more information on DSLT

operation, see Section 751: Key Telephone/DSLT Quick Reference.

Figure 7. DSLT

DIGITAL BUSINESS SYSTEM

No.

NAME No.

NAME

1

1

4 GHI

2 ABC 3 DEF

5 JKL 6 MNO

*

7 PRS 8 TUV 9 WXY

0

OPER

#

Absence Message

Description

Extension users can leave text messages related to their phones when they are away. When the unattended extension is dialed, the text message displays on the caller’s phone. Any one of the following messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 have no default message text. All the messages can be changed through system programming.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 219

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Table 21. Absence Messages

Message No.

2

3

0

1

4

Message Text Displayed on

Called Party’s Key

Telephone

In Meeting

At Lunch

Out of Office

Vacation

Another Office

Message No.

7

8

5

6

9

Message Text Displayed on

Called Party’s Key

Telephone

Absence_No_5

Absence_No_6

Absence_No_7

Absence_No_8

Absence_No_9

Optionally, a return time can be input. Example Return Times for Absence Messages include:

Input

No input

9

11

615

1035

Display

Return

Return 9:00

Return 11:00

Return 6:15

Return 10:35

Operation

To set an Absence Message

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729 [UK/HK] or 729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the Absence Message number. (See Table 21 above.)

4. If desired, enter the 4-digit returning time.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

220

To cancel an Absence Message

Action

1. Lift the handset .

2. Enter the Absence Message code (default =729 [UK/HK] or

729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Press the HOLD key.

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Calling parties without a display get a busy signal, rather than the Absence Message.

• Regardless of setting an Absence Message on a DDI/DIL extension, DDI/DILcalls are routed according to the trunk ringing setting.

• An absence message may also be cancelled by dialing 7**. This cancels Do Not Disturb (DND) and Call Forwarding-All Calls as well.

Account Codes

Description

You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the System

Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging) record.

In addition verified account codes may be used to change the Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call

Barring) level to allow calls to numbers otherwise restricted.

Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.

This feature works with SMDR (Call Logging). During a phone call, a station user can silently enter an accounting or client billing code. The entered Code will display on the phone’s LCD as it’s dialled, so the user can tell it’s being registered. Then later, the Call Logging reports will show the Code dialled for each call, and even sort the report by these Codes.

There are two different types of account codes: Non-Verified and Verified Account Codes. Prior to

Version 5.0, the maximum amount of account code numbers for both types could range from 1-10 digits. Beginning with Version 5.0, a second mode has been added that allows the user to set the maximum amount of account code numbers from 1-4 digits. An account code error will occur when more than the maximum number of digits are entered.

Non-Verified Account Codes

Non-Verified Codes aren’t checked by the system for validity. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits.

Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced

Account Codes (the user must enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can enter a code, but doesn’t have to, for each call).

Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to incoming and/or outgoing calls. For incoming calls, the user can enter the Code anytime during the call. For outgoing calls, the user either enters the Code before accessing an outside line (for forced Codes), or anytime during the call (for voluntary Codes).

Verified Account Codes

Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a 4-digit or 10-digit code that has been preprogrammed into an Account Code Table. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits.

These codes can also be either forced or voluntary. You can program these codes with their own Toll Restriction Service (TRS) - Call Barring Class assignment so that, when entered, they will override the extension’s TRS (Call Barring) Class. Thus, Verified Account

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 221

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Code users can “float” from phone to phone, placing calls that would normally be restricted on that phone.

Non-Verified Account Codes

Non-Verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code before making a call.)

You can assign Non-Verified Account codes to both incoming and outgoing calls. To assign an account code to an outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call or during the call.

To assign an account code to an incoming call, you enter the account code during the call.

Operation

To enter an account code before making a call:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).

3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).

4. Press the # key.

5. Press a vacant trunk key or enter a trunk access code

(default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or

81-84).

6. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To enter an account code during an outside call:

Action

1. During a call, press the MEMORY key.

2. Press the # key.

3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).

4. Press the # key.

Result

Verified Account Codes

Stations restricted from outside call origination by Toll Restriction Service (TRS) - Call Barring can be allowed to make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS (Call

Barring). After a call is made, the Call Logging record for the call will show the verified account code.

222 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Operation

To make an outside call that requires an account code:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).

3. Enter the Account Code (10 digits).

4. Press a vacant CO Trunk key or enter a trunk access code

(default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or

81-84).

5. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• An Call Logging printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code records.

Considerations

• Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.

• Even though up to 10 digits may be entered, the system verifies the ID based on the first 4 digits only.

• Account codes will be cancelled after using trunk queuing.

• Account Codes interact with TRS (Call Barring) as shown in the following table:

Forced or Not Forced

Not Forced

Forced

Verified or

Non-Verified

Non-Verified

Verified

Non-Verified

Verified

TRS (Call Barring) Class

No Account Entry Account Entry

Extension Port Based TRS

Class

TRS Class for Forced

Account Code

(FF1 0 19 0001)

Extension Port Based TRS

Class

Account Code Based TRS

Class

Extension Port Based TRS

Class

Account Code Based TRS

Class

Attendant Group Calls

Description

You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialling the designated attendant number.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 223

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To call an attendant group:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0 [UK/HK] or 9

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.

• The attendant pilot number is flexible.

• If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialled.

• Attendant calls are always tone calls (i.e., not voice calls).

Auto Repeat Dial

Description

If you press the REDIAL key while receiving busy tone on an outside call, the System automatically redials the number. The System continues to redial the number at set intervals until the called number answers, the caller hangs up, or the maximum of 15 redial attempts is made.

Operation

To use Auto Repeat Dial:

Action

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

3. Dial the phone number.

4. Press the REDIAL key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

System automatically redials number

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

224 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Background Music

Description

If your System is set up to provide Background Music, music can be played from the speakers of idle telephones. If a call is made to an extension receiving Background Music, the music stops and the phone rings. Background Music is also interrupted when the phone goes offhook.

The System can also provide Music-on-Hold (MOH) using a separate music source (except with

CPC-HS). If MOH is provided, callers automatically hear music when they are placed on hold. (For

more information on “MOH”, see page 49.)

Operation

To turn Background Music on:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To turn Background Music off:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Background Music code (default = *30).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• The music source must be purchased separately. It is not provided with the System.

Important: A license may be required from the Society of Composers, Authors, and Publishers (ASCAP) or similar organizations to transmit radio or recorded music through the MOH and/or Background Music feature. Panasonic, its distributors, and affiliates assume no liability should users of Panasonic equipment fail to obtain such a license.

Considerations

• N/A

Busy Override

Description

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 225

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Busy Override allows you to break into one another’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent information or to create three-party conference calls.

Operation

To use Extension Busy Override:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9 [UK/HK] or 9#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

• Alert tone sounds to both extensions

(system programming required)

• Connected to both parties

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.

• The default for the Override Alert Tone is off. If the Override Alert Tone is enabled, the tone will be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.

Callback Request

Description

If you dial a busy extension, Callback Request enables the System to call you back when that extension becomes free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.

Operation

To set a Callback Request:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or

3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

Ringback tone

System calls back when called extension becomes free

226 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

To respond to the callback request:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Result

System automatically redials extension

To cancel a Callback Request:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the Callback Cancellation code (default = 769 [UK/

HK] or 769# [ Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset .

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Call Forwarding

Description

Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to Voice

Mail. Call Forwarding can be set or cancelled under the following conditions from either your own extension or from an alternate extension:

• Call Forwarding - All Calls

• Call Forwarding - Busy

• Call Forwarding - No Answer

Call Forwarding-All Calls

When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately forwarded.

Operation

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 227

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

To set Call Forwarding-All Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 721 (UK/HK) or 721# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 741 (UK/HK) or 741# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.

4. Enter the destination number:

• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension number.

• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then enter the SSD bin number.

Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instruc-

tions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 255.)

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To cancel Call Forwarding-All Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 751 (UK/HK) or 751# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call Forwarding - Busy

When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.

228 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Operation

To set Call Forwarding - Busy:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 722 (UK/HK) or 722# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 742 (UK/HK) or 742#(Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the number of the extension whose calls you want to forward

4. Enter the destination number:

• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension number.

• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then enter the SSD bin number.

Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instruc-

tions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 255.)

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 732 (UK/HK) or 732# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 752 (UK/HK) or 752# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call Forwarding - No Answer

When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call Forward - No Answer timer expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 229

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 723 (UK/HK) or 723# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 743 (UK/HK) or 743# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward

4. Dial the destination number:

• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension number.

• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then enter the SSD bin number.

Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instruc-

tions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 255.)

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 733 (UK/HK) or 733# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 753 (UK/HK) or 753# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb

The System allows you to set or cancel both Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your own extension in one step.

230 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

To cancel Call Forwarding and DND:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the CF/DND All Clear code (default = 7**).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding DND activated.For example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.

• If forwarding to an outside number, the destination number must be pre-programmed into a

System Speed Dial (SSD) code.

• Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.

• You can set Call Forwarding - All Calls while Call Forwarding - No Answer and/or Call

Forwarding - Busy are set. Cancelling one mode only affects that mode; however, the other modes will remain set until cancelled individually.

• An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.

• If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call

Forward No Answer destination.

• You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 * *.

Call Hold

Description

The system provides the following types of Call Hold:

• System Hold

• Floating Hold

• Exclusive Hold

• Broker’s Hold

• Call Park (Station)

System Hold

You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on

System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 231

Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Operation

To place a call on System Hold:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

Section 700 - Operation

Result

Intercom dial tone

To retrieve a call placed on System Hold:

Action

1. Press the HOLD key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code (default = *0).

3. Enter the trunk number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Floating Hold

Floating Hold is a type of System Hold that allows you to retrieve a held call from any extension by dialling the Floating Hold orbit number for the held call.

Floating Hold is useful when the intended recipient of a call must be located via a page. The call can be placed in a Floating Hold “orbit” and that orbit number announced during the page. The paged party can then pick up the call by dialling the orbit number.

Operation

To place a call on Floating Hold:

Action

1. Press the HOLD key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

232 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:

Action

1. Enter the Floating Hold Answer feature access code

(default = *9).

2. Enter the Floating Hold orbit number (001-576 (CPC-288/

576), 01-96 (CPC-96) or 001-099 (CPC-288/576) or 01-09

(CPC-96) (See considerations below.)

Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The number of floating hold orbits available may very depending on the Station Park/Floating

Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0025). The station park pickup access code can set to *9

(default). The “*9” access code operates as follows

System Size

96

Above 96

Virtual Line Number and Operation

01-09: Floating Hold pick up

10-96: Station Park Hold pick up purpose

001-099: Floating Hold pick up

100-576: Station Park Hold pick up purpose

Exclusive Hold

With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used to hold trunk calls and extension calls.

Operation

To place a call on Exclusive Hold:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive when placed on hold by pressing the HOLD key.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 233

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Broker’s Hold

Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by pressing the

HOLD key.

Operation

To place a call on Broker’s Hold:

1. Pick up the first call.

2. Press the HOLD key.

3. Pick up the second call.

4. Press the HOLD key.

Action

First call on hold

Result

Second call on hold, first call retrieved

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Call Park

You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient of the call.

Trunk, extension, and network calls may be parked.

There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the ICX. One way is to park the call at the receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialling the park answer code plus the parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call. Beginning in Version 5.0, an

Extension Group Pickup code allows the user to pick up a Transfer Recall (only on non-appearing calls), a Hold Recall, and a Station Park Recall.

To park a call on this extension:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Enter the Call Park Hold access code (default = 771 [UK/

HK] or 771# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.

Result

• Current call on hold

234 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Enter the Call Park Answer/Other Ext. access code (default

= 773 (UK/HK) or 773# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

OR...

Enter the Call Park/Floating Hold Answer feature access code (default = *9).

2. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.

Result

Intercom dial tone

• Connected to parked call

To park a call at another extension:

Action

1. Press the HOLD key.

2. Enter the Call Park Transfer access code (default = 774

[UK/HK] or 774# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call.

4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.

Result

• Current call on hold

To retrieve a transferred call park:

Action

1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter Call Park Answer/Self access code (default = 772

[UK/HK] or 772# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

• Connected to parked call

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• You cannot park more than one call at a time.

• No more than one Call Park Answer key may be assigned to a single telephone.

• If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the parked call.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 235

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Call Pickup

Description

The System allows the following types of call pickup:

• Extension Group Pickup

• Extension Direct Pickup

• Trunk Group Pickup

• Trunk Direct Pickup

Extension Group Pickup

Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.

Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:

Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension group.

Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own extension group.

Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension group.

Operation

To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default

= 701 [UK/HK] or 701# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

236

To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code

(default = 702 [UK/HK] or 702# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

To use Specified Group Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703 [UK/

HK] or 703# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the call is ringing.

4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Extension Group Pickup - 12 / CCU - maximum 72 group / 6 CCU configuration

Extension Direct Pickup

Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialling the number of the ringing extension.

Operation

To use Extension Direct Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704

[UK/HK] or 704# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.

4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Trunk Group Pickup

Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO incoming trunk group.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 237

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To use Trunk Group Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code (default = 709 [UK/

HK] or 709# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Trunk Direct Pickup

Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number.

Operation

To use Trunk Direct Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code (default = *0).

3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system hold) trunk.

4. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Call on exclusive hold cannot be picked up.

238 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Call Transfer

Description

The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to transfer a call to a busy extension.)

Supervised Transfer

When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party answers, then he/she announces the call.

Operation

To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.

3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.

4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Seize a trunk and dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.

3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.

4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Unsupervised Transfer

When completing an unsupervised transfer the transferring party hangs up before the third party answers.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 239

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.

3. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Enter a trunk access code.

3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.

4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension

Operation

To camp a call onto a busy extension:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.

3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-On activated, enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/

HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset or pressing the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Camp-on tone heard at called extension

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• On-Hook Transfer is not enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service (COS), he/she cannot complete the transfer.

240 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

• If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call will recall to the transferring extension.

• If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert to the Attendant group.

• If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.

• You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.

• You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension

221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to extension 225.

• Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.

• If a call is unsupervised transferred to a busy extension, the call will camp on to the busy extension.

• To transfer to a outside party, it is best to use supervised transfer. If the trunk-to-trunk on-hook transfer restriction is enabled, a blind transfer will result in the loss of the second call but the second call will be kept on hold. If not enabled and the second outside party is busy, the transferred party will receive busy.

Camp-On (Call Waiting)

Description

If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also press the HOLD key to place the first call on hold and then answer the waiting call.

The System provides two types of call waiting:

Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal to the busy extension. You need only to remain on the line.

Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy extension.

Operation

To set Automatic Camp-on:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

• Called party hears alert tone

• Calling party hears ringback tone

3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 241

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

To set Manual Camp-on:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. Enter the Camp-on (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/

HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

• Called party hears alert tone

• Calling party hears ringback tone

To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:

Action

1. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key again to be connected to the waiting call.

OR....

Press the HOLD key.

Result

• Current call placed on hold

• Connected to waiting call

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “Camping a Call Onto a

Busy Extension” on page 240.

Conference Calls

Version 3.0 and higher

Description

Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time. If the optional Conference Card is installed, additional parties up to a total of 8 can participate in a conference call.

Any combination of extensions and trunk lines can be in the conference as long as the original extension is in the conference and the total number of parties does not exceed 8. Only one operation is used to establish and add to a conference. You simply have to place the current call on hold, dial the next party and press the CONF key. No different operation or access code is required to add additional parties to the call.

When no optional conference card is installed, the system supports the following types of three-party conference calls:

• 3 extensions

242 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

• 2 extensions and 1 trunk

• 1 extension and 2 trunks

When the optional 8-party conference card is installed, the System supports any combination of conference calls, except all outside lines.

Operation

To establish a conference call:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key or the line key of your current call.

2. If adding an outside party, dial a trunk access code.

3. Dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call.

4. Press the CONF key when your call is answered.

5. To add additional parties, repeat steps 1-4

6. To drop out of the conference call, hang up.

Result

• Outside dial tone

To establish a two-party private conversation from a 3-party conference:

Action

1. While on a call, press the CONF + 1 (2) to have a private conversation with the CNF 1 (2) party.

Result

You and the selected party are in a separate conversation from the other conference parties.

2. To reestablish the conference, press the CONF key.

To remove a Busy Tone (Hang up) from an 8-party conference :

Action

1. During an conference with more than 3 parties, press

CONF + (n) (where n is the number 1-8 for the conference parties) to individually select a conference party.

2. If you did not select the conference party that is giving busy tone, re-enter the conference by pressing the CONF key.

3. If you selected the conference party that is giving busy tone, hang up and then go off-hook again and press the CONF key to re-enter the conference call.

Result

The other party is placed on hold.

Hardware Requirements

• A Conference Card (VB-44120) must be installed in the System in order to conference more than three parties.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 243

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

• If all the internal parties hang up, the conference call will be disconnected. If the internal party remains in the conversation, the conference call remains in progress.

• When three parties are conferenced, a built-in 3-party conference circuit is used. If no 3-party conference circuit is available, a conference cannot be established.

• When a fourth party is added, the conference is moved to a conference circuit on the 8-party conference card. If an 8-party conference circuit is not available, a fourth party cannot be added to a conference.

• Once an 8-party conference circuit is used, it continues to be used as long as the conference continues.

• An 8-party conference card supports up to four 8-party conference circuits. However, the card must be placed in cabinet slots 1, 5, or 9 to support more than one 8-party conference circuit (and jumpered accordingly).

Do-Not-Disturb

Description

You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.

You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.

Operation

To set DND for your own extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or

720# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

244

To cancel DND for your own extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the DND Set/Cancel code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or

720# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

To set DND for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740

[UK/HK] or 740# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Result

Intercom dial tone

To cancel DND for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750

[UK/HK] or 750# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Forced DND override is available.

• DND override function is available by Busy Override code.

DP to DTMF Signal Conversion

Description

Dial Pulse (DP) to Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Signal Conversion allows you to switch from

DP to DTMF signalling when using a DP trunk. For instance, if you dial into a Voice Mail system using a DP trunk, you can switch to DTMF signalling to communicate with the Voice Mail system.

(The System can automatically change DP to DTMF tones based on the incoming and outgoing timers).

Operation

To switch from DP to DTMF dialling:

Action

1. Press the * key or the # key.

Result

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 245

Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Section 700 - Operation

Flash

Description

You can send a flash signal on your telephone to release an outside line and then either automatically reseize the same outside line or switch to extension dial tone status by pressing the FLASH key.

Trunk programming determines whether your phone reseizes the outside line or switches to extension dial tone status.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Hot Line

Description

Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre-assigned extension or speed dial number simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.

Operation

To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Automatically connected to pre-assigned extension or speed dial number

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

246 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Intercom Calling

Description

The System provides two methods of intercom calling:

Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.

Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.

Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access code.

Operation

To make a call using Intercom Calling:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to make a voice call, enter 1.

Or, if your extension is set for voice call and you want to make a tone call, enter 1.

4. Speak when your call is answered

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.

• You cannot change from voice call to tone call.

Last Number Redial

Description

Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dallied by pressing the

REDIAL key.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 247

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To automatically redial the last number dialled:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

OR...

Enter a trunk access code.

2. Press the REDIAL key.

3. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

Outside dial tone (if trunk access code entered)

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both intercom and trunk calls, or trunk calls only.

Message Waiting/Callback

Description

If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication at that extension, requesting a return call.

Operation

To leave a message waiting indication:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. While the telephone is still ringing, or when you hear the busy tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4

[UK/HK] or 4# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Ring or busy tone

Message lamp flashes at called extension

248 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

To answer a message waiting indication (callback):

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6).

Result

Intercom dial tone

• Telephone automatically dials extension that sent message waiting indication

Message lamp goes off when your call is answered

To cancel a Callback Message:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Message lamp goes off

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party Voice Mail. See “Voice Mail Integration

(Third Party)” on page 72.

Offhook Signalling

Description

Offhook Signalling sends a tone to a busy extension to indicate that another trunk call has arrived or a call is camped on.

Operation

After receiving an offhook signal during a call:

Action

1. Press the HOLD key.

2. Hang up and then go off-hook to answer call.

Result

Note:

For details about handling multiple calls, see “Call Hold” on page 231.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 249

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The trunk call type may be either multiple ring, direct, or camp-on.

• The system does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:

• During a conference call

• During an OHVA or Busy override

• Data Privacy is enabled

• The receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.

Offhook Voice Announce

Description

You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice

Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement that only the called party can hear. You can also transfer a held call to a busy extension after making the announcement using this feature.

Operation

To make an OHVA :

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. Enter the OHVA feature access code (default = 8 [UK/HK] or 8# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Make your announcement

Busy signal

Result

250

To transfer a call using OHVA:

Action

1. While on a call, press the HOLD key.

2. Dial the extension number to which the call is being transferred.

3. Enter OHVA feature access code (default = 8 [UK/HK] or

8# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) and announce the call to be transferred.

4. If transfer is not accepted, press the FL/R key.

5. Replace the handset.

Result

Current call on hold

Busy signal

Transfer cancelled

ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• If Onhook Transfer is enabled, the held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the

OHVA hangs up.

• If the transferred call is not answered immediately, it will queue for a set time limit, then return to the extension sending the OHVA by Transfer Recall Timer.

• You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.

• If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.

Onhook Dialling

Description

Onhook Dialling allows users to dial without lifting the handset. However, the Digital Single Line

Telephone (DSLT) does not have a microphone so you must lift the handset to talk.

Operation

To use onhook dialling:

Action

1. Press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia] or 81-84), or dial an extension number.

3. If you entered a trunk access code in step 2, dial the phone number. Otherwise, proceed to step 4.

4. When the call is answered, lift the handset to talk.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

Paging

Description

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 251

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of an external paging system connected to the System.

Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.

Operation

To make a page:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).

3. Enter the number of the desired paging group (0-9).

4. Make your announcement.

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Meet-Me Answer

To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Connected to specified party

Hardware Requirements

• External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.

Considerations

• If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to paging groups 0-9 through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.

• An extension can belong to more than one paging group.

• Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal.

• Beginning with Version 4.5 and higher, the paging system can be set to “timeout” if a page remains unanswered for a specified length of time (0 to 255 seconds). If this feature is set and the timeout period has elapsed, the page originator’s handset will emit a Fast Busy Tone.

Room Monitoring

Description

252 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

This feature allows the user to monitor the sounds in a room from another extension or room. The transmitter in the telephone handset is used as a remote “microphone” for monitoring these sounds.

To activate this feature, the monitored extension must enable the Room Monitor feature before the monitoring extension can listen to the sounds in the room. The monitored extension can be enabled using a SLT, DSLT, or Key Telephone. No special programming is required to allow an extension to enable the monitored mode.

Operation

To set up the monitored extension:

Action

1. Dial the monitored extension access code (default 775),

OR...

Note: The handset must be off-hook to activate the

Room Monitor feature.

Press an FF key assigned with the monitored access code

Result

You will hear a confirmation tone after the monitored extension has enabled the

Room Monitor feature. (If the monitored extension has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)

Additional operations may be performed from the monitored extension when it is in monitored mode:

Action

1. Placing the handset back on-hook or pressing ON/OFF

2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, PROG, CONF, MIC, MENU,

PREV, NEXT, REDIAL, MEMORY, FF Key

3. FL/R

Result

Monitored mode is cancelled. Extension returns to idle.

No response is given. Extension remains in monitored mode.

Monitored mode is cancelled. Dial tone is returned to handset.

Note: When a monitored extension receives a call, the caller hears a busy tone.

To set up the monitoring extension:

Action

1. Dial the monitoring extension access code (default 776) and the extension number of the monitored extension, OR...

Press an FF key assigned the monitored access code and the extension number of the monitored extension, OR...

While the handset is on-hook, press an FF key assigned to the Room Monitor followed by the monitored extension number.

Result

The monitoring extension enters the monitoring mode. (If the monitored extension has an LCD display, a confirmation message will also be shown.)

The monitoring extension will automatically enter the monitoring mode.

The monitoring operation can be allowed or denied by extension COS and is controlled by the Busy

Override feature. If Busy Override is denied and the user attempts to monitor an extension, the user will hear a fast busy tone.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 253

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Additional operations may be performed from the monitoring extension when it is in monitoring mode:

Action

1. Placing the handset back On Hook or pressing ON/OFF

2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #, PROG, CONF, MIC, MENU,

PREV, NEXT, FL/R, REDIAL, MEMORY, FF Key

3. LINE

Result

Monitoring mode is cancelled. Extension returns to idle.

No response is given. Extension remains in monitoring mode.

Monitoring mode is cancelled. Dial tone is returned to handset.

Services available on the monitoring extension while the Room Monitoring feature is active:

• Camp On

• Call Back

• Message displayed on LCD when extension is busy

• Message Waiting On/Off

• Cancellation of DND and Call Forwarding by another extension

• Busy Transfer

• DIL Incoming Call (Queuing)

Services NOT available to either the monitored or monitoring extension when this feature is active:

• Busy Override

• On-Hook VA

• The ability to receive a text message

• Silent Monitor

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Allow/deny Busy Override Send—Monitoring extension)

• FF1-2-02: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 1

• FF1-2-03: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 2

Considerations

• If the monitored extension is placed on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitoring extension will hear a fast busy tone.

• If the monitoring extension goes on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitored extension will remain in the monitored mode, and can be accessed by any other extension allowed to access the room monitoring mode.

• A room cannot be monitored from more than one extension at a time. If an attempt is made to monitor an extension while the extension is being monitored, the user will hear a fast busy tone.

• ISDN (s-point) extensions cannot access the Room Monitor feature in either the monitor or monitored modes.

• A monitoring extension cannot forward a call on hold to a monitored extension.

• A monitored extension cannot receive a transferred call.

254 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

• If DND is enabled on either the monitoring or monitored extension, DND status is displayed on the calling extension’s telephone.

• If the monitoring or monitored extension has an absence message set, the absence message will be displayed on the calling extension’s telephone.

Speed Dialling

Description

The System supports the following speed dial features:

• Personal Speed Dial (PSD)

• System Speed Dial (SSD)

• Speed Dial Linking

• Speed Dial Name Assignment

Personal Speed Dial

You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored in PSD bins numbered 80-99.

Operation

To assign PSD numbers:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/

HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

4. Dial the phone number.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. If necessary, access an outside line.

3. Press the MEMORY key.

OR...

Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Outside dial tone

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 255

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Action

4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

5. Complete the call and replace the handset or press the ON/

OFF key.

Result

To delete a PSD number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/

HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.

• Speed Dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters. The following table reflects which keys to use.

To indicate . . .

Digit or character

Intercom Level *

MCO Code 9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia)**

MCO Code 81**

MCO Code 82**

MCO Code 83**

MCO Code 84**

Pause

DP - DTMF Code

SSD Code

Hyphen (-)

DTMF Conversion After the

Other Party Answers

Enter/Press

0, 1 - 9, *, #

MEMORY * #

MEMORY * 0

MEMORY * 71

MEMORY * 72

MEMORY * 73

MEMORY * 74

REDIAL

MEMORY * *

MEMORY

NN(N)

PROG

MEMORY * 3

256 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

* Indicates that the digits that follow are either a feature access code or an extension number. (Not needed if your System is set for Intercom Level.) See Note below.

** Indicates that the digits that follow are for an outside number and the System should seize the next available trunk when dialling. (Not needed if your System is set for Trunk

Level.) See Note below.

Note:

The System has two levels - Trunk Level and Intercom Level. If set at Trunk Level

(default), you must enter the code for Intercom Level when programming a feature access code or extension number for speed dialling. If the System is set at Intercom Level, you must enter the

MCO Code when programming an outside number for speed dialling.

System Speed Dial

You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins

000-799.

Operation

To assign SSD numbers:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/

HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

4. Dial the phone number.

5. Press the HOLD key.

6. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. If necessary, access an outside line.

3. Press the MEMORY key.

OR...

Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).

4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

5. Complete call and replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Outside dial tone

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 257

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

To delete an SSD number:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/

HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or -799).

4. Press the HOLD key.

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The system can be programmed to allow SSD Numbers to override toll restrictions.

Speed Dial Linking

You can automatically link together up to 5 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers longer than 24 characters. You can then dial the entire number by pressing the programmed PSD key or by entering the speed dial bin number.

Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier access codes, etc.

Note:

Before linking multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin, the SSD bins must already have been programmed with the appropriate speed dial information.

Operation

To link multiple SSD numbers to a PSD bin:

Action

1. Determine the SSD bin numbers to be linked

2. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

3. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/

HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

5. Press the MEMORY key.

6. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799) that contains the first part of the number to be called.

7. Repeat steps 5-6 up to 5 more times for all additional SSDs to be dialled.

8. Press the HOLD key when finished.

Result

258 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

To use a PSD that links multiple SSDs:

Action

1. If necessary, select the trunk group (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84). (Normally the trunk is selected by the speed dial numbers.)

2. Press the MEMORY key.

3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Result

To manually link speed dials together:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. If necessary, access an outside line.

3. Press the MEMORY key, then enter the PSD or SSD bin number.

4. Press the MEMORY key and enter the PSD or SSD codes to dial the parts of the phone number until it is completed.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Outside dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 259

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Station Lockout

Description

Use the Station Lockout feature to limit use of your phone by others when you are away from your telephone. When the Station Lockout feature is in use, the TRS (Call Barring) Class of your telephone is changed. Anyone using your telephone is limited to the calling abilities defined by this Lockout

TRS (Call Barring) Class.

In addition, with the appropriate COS, you can set or cancel Station Lockout for other telephones.

To activate Station Lockout feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Station Lockout feature code (default = 746 [UK/

HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To cancel Station Lockout feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel feature code (default =

746 [UK/HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) .

3. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To activate Station Lockout feature for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Station Lockout Set for another extension feature code (default = 747 [UK/HK] or 747# [Taiwan, Malaysia,

Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

260 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

To cancel Station Lockout feature for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel for another extension feature code (default = 748 [UK/HK] or 748# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.

4. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

5. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To change the Walking TRS/Station Lockout security code:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout

Security Code Change code (default =749 [UK/HK] or

749# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the current Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

4. Enter the new Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

5. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Considerations

• Walking TRS (Call Barring) and Station Lockout use the same security code.

• If you enter an incorrect key code and then try to dial, the phone will issue a busy tone.

• If station lockout is set, the phone is limited to the Station Lockout TRS (Call Barring) Class outside calling abilities. This TRS (Call Barring) Class should be carefully selected to only allow the desired call types.

• Without Walking TRS (Call Barring) /Station Lockout Security Code, you cannot set the Station

Lockout feature.

• You cannot override station lockout using Walking TRS (Call Barring) feature.

Step Call (Reset Call)

Description

If you dial a busy extension, the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply pressing the last digit of the new extension number.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 261

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To use Step Call (Reset Call) to dial another extension (after a busy extension):

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Dial an extension number.

3. Dial the last digit of the next extension number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

Example: You dial extension 213, but it is busy. To dial extension 214, enter 4.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The second extension called using the Step Call (Reset Call) feature must have the same number of digits as the first extension.

• If you program the System for Step Call (Reset Call), the following features are not available:

Camp-on (Ext. no. +

2

[UK/HK] or

2#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]), Callback Request (Ext. no. +

3

[UK/HK] or

3#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]), Message Waiting (Ext. no. +

4

[UK/HK] or

4#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], Message Waiting (Priority for VM) (Ext. no. +

5

[UK/HK] or

5#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]), Intercom Busy Override (Ext. no. +

9

[UK/HK] or

9#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Timed Reminder Call

Description

Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.

Operation

To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).

3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.

(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1

AM, 1300 for 1 PM.)

4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Result

Intercom dial tone

262 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).

3. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• An alarm tone (default = 60 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.

• An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.

• To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.

• If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3 minutes later.

Trunk Access

Description

The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside call:

• Direct Trunk Access

• MCO Trunk Access

Direct Trunk Access

Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access to test trunks or to access data trunks.

Operation

To use Direct Trunk Access:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the Direct Trunk Access code (default = 88).

3. Enter the desired trunk number.

4. Dial the phone number.

Outside dial tone

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 263

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

• N/A

MCO Trunk Access

The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle trunk from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code.

Operation

To seize an idle trunk:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter the desired trunk access number (default = 9 [UK/

HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84). (See Table

22.)

3. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Outside dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-CCU configuration. These lines can be divided into 99 different trunk groups.

• Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines.

• Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes. System defaults for MCO trunk access codes are displayed in the following table.

• MCO1 can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature.

• MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.

Table 22. MCO Trunk Access Codes

MCO Group

MCO1

MCO2

MCO3

MCO4

MCO5

Trunk Access Code

9 (UK/HK) or 0 (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia)

81

82

83

84

264 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Trunk Queuing

Description

When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, and Indonesia]) and all outside lines in a trunk group are busy, the System can call you when a line becomes free.

Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings.

Operation

To set Trunk Queuing:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

2. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or

3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Press the ON/OFF key.

5. Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Outside dial tone

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

• Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be cancelled.

• The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make a call using the MCO Trunk Access feature.

Universal Night Answer to Page

Description

During night mode, Universal Night Answer (UNA) sends incoming calls for selected trunks to ring external paging speakers.

Universal Night Answer calls can be picked up from any extension, provided the extension’s Class of

Service (COS) allows UNA answer.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 265

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To answer a UNA call:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the UNA to Page Pickup code (default = 705 [UK/

HK] or 705# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call is received.

Hardware Requirements

• External paging speakers and associated equipment are not provided with the ICX; they must be purchased separately.

Considerations

• The UNA Ringing port can be specified by the caller’s tenant group or by the trunk ringing assignment.

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service

Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Class of Service (COS)allows an extension user to “carry” his or her toll restrictions to another phone.

Before the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS feature can be used, a Walking TRS (Call Barring) code must be entered at your extension before using dialling privileges at another extension.

Operation

To use a Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension other than your own.

2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring) Access code (default

= 87).

3. Dial your extension number.

4. Enter your Walking code (0001-9999)

5. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

6. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Walking TRS COS remains in effect until you replace the handset.

7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

266 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 6. DSLT Features

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Considerations

(Call Barring)

• The same Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code can be used on more than one extension.

• Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.

• ARS and TRS (Call Barring) dialling privileges follow the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS.

• Before entering a new Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code, you must first clear the existing code.

• When Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension number) appears in Call Logging.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 267

Chapter 6. DSLT Features Section 700 - Operation

268 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Chapter 7. SLT Features

Single Line Telephones (SLTs) are industry-standard 2500 sets. SLTs are not equipped with feature keys or line keys, so basic telephone operations are performed by pressing dialpad keys and/or using the switchhook.

This chapter describes the following features that are available with SLTs.

Topic

Absence Message

Account Codes

Non-Verified Account Codes

Verified Account Codes

Attendant Group Calls

Busy Override

Callback Request

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding - All Calls

Call Forwarding - Busy

Call Forwarding - No Answer

Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb

Call Hold

System Hold

Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)

Exclusive Hold

Broker’s Hold

Call Park

Call Pickup

Extension Group Pickup

Extension Direct Pickup

Trunk Group Pickup

Trunk Direct Pickup

Call Transfer

Supervised Transfer

Unsupervised Transfer

Camp-On (Call Waiting)

Conference Calls

Do-Not-Disturb (DND)

Flash Send

Intercom Calling

Last Number Redial

Message Waiting/Callback

Page

294

295

296

297

298

289

290

291

293

287

288

288

289

284

284

286

286

281

281

282

283

277

278

279

280

275

275

276

277

271

272

273

273

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 269

Chapter 7. SLT Features

Topic

Offhook Signalling

Offhook Voice Announce

Paging

Meet-Me Answer

Room Monitoring

Speed Dialling

Personal Speed Dial

System Speed Dial

Speed Dial Linking

Station Lockout

Step Call (Reset Call)

Timed Reminder Call

Trunk Access

Direct Trunk Access

MCO Trunk Access

Trunk Queuing

Universal Night Answer to Page

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service

Page

310

311

311

312

306

307

309

309

313

314

302

303

304

305

299

300

301

301

Section 700 - Operation

270 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

Absence Message

Description

Extension users can leave text messages related to their phones when they are away. When the unattended extension is dialed, the text message displays on the caller’s phone. Any one of the following messages can be selected. Messages 5 to 9 have no default message text. All the messages can be changed through system programming.

Table 23. Absence Messages

Message No.

2

3

0

1

4

Message Text Displayed on

Called Party’s Key

Telephone

In Meeting

At Lunch

Out of Office

Vacation

Another Office

Message No.

7

8

5

6

9

Message Text Displayed on

Called Party’s Key

Telephone

Absence_No_5

Absence_No_6

Absence_No_7

Absence_No_8

Absence_No_9

Optionally, a return time can be input. Example Return Times for Absence Messages include:

Input

No input

9

11

615

1035

Display

Return

Return 9:00

Return 11:00

Return 6:15

Return 10:35

Operation

To set an Absence Message

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729 [UK/HK] or 729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the Absence Message number. (See Table 23 above.)

4. If desired, enter the 4-digit returning time.

5. Flash the hookswitch.

6. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 271

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

To cancel an Absence Message

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Absence Message code (default = 729 [UK/HK] or 729# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Flash the hookswitch.

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1 (System): Extension Class of Service Setting

• FF3 (Extension): Extension Class of Service Assignment

• FF8 (Maintenance): Absence Messages

Considerations

• Calling parties without a display get a busy signal, rather than the Absence Message.

• Regardless of setting an Absence Message on a DDI/DIL extension, DDI/DIL calls are routed according to the trunk ringing setting.

• An absence message may also be cancelled by dialling 7**. This cancels Do-Not-Disturb (DND) and Call Forwarding-All Calls as well.

Account Codes

Description

You can assign account codes to clients to facilitate billing and to track call dates and times, numbers called, and outside line numbers used. This information is printed for each account on the Call

Logging record.

In addition verified account codes may be used to change the Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call

Barring) level to allow calls to numbers otherwise restricted.

Account codes may be either forced or unforced (voluntary) and either verified or unverified.

This feature works with Call Logging. Before making an outgoing call, a station user can silently enter an accounting or client billing code. Then later, the Call Logging reports will show the Code dialled for each call, and even sort the report by these Codes.

There are two different types of account codes: Non-Verified and Verified Account Codes. Prior to

Version 5.0, the maximum amount of account code numbers for both types could range from 1-10 digits. Beginning with Version 5.0, a second mode has been added that allows the user to set the maximum amount of account code numbers from 1-4 digits. An account code error will occur when more than the maximum number of digits are entered.

272 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

Non-Verified Account Codes

Non-Verified Codes aren’t checked by the system for validity. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits.

Individual phones can be programmed to accept forced

Account Codes (the user must enter a code for every call) or voluntary Account Codes (the user can enter a code, but doesn’t have to, for each call).

Non-Verified Account Codes can be assigned to outgoing calls. The user either enters the Code before accessing an outside line (for forced or voluntary Codes).

Verified Account Codes

Verified Account Codes entered by phone users must match a 4-digit or 10-digit code that has been preprogrammed into an Account Code Table. Depending on the setting, the user can enter anything from 1-4 digits or 1-10 digits.

These codes can also be either forced or voluntary. You can program these codes with their own TRS (Call Barring) Class assignment so that, when entered, they will override the extension’s TRS (Call Barring) Class. Thus, Verified Account Code users can “float” from phone to phone, placing calls that would normally be restricted on that phone.

Non-Verified Account Codes

Non-Verified Account codes are voluntary codes. (i.e., You do not have to enter an account code before making a call.)

You can assign Non-Verified Account codes to outgoing calls only. To assign an account code to an outgoing call, you enter the account code before making the call.

Operation

To enter an account code before making a call:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Account Code feature code (default = 8#).

3. Enter the Account Code (up to 10 digits).

4. Press the # key.

5. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

6. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Verified Account Codes

Stations restricted from outside call origination by TRS (Call Barring) can be allowed to make outgoing calls by entering a Verified Account code that changes the TRS (Call Barring). After a call is made, the Call Logging record for the call will show the verified account code.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 273

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To make an outside call that requires an account code:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Verified Account ID code (default = 8#).

3. Enter the Account Code (max. 10 digits).

4. Press the # key.

5. Enter trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

6. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• A Call Logging printer or external call accounting system is required to collect account code records.

Related Programming

• FF1-0-19: TRS (Call Barring) Class for Forced Account Code

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF3: Forced Account

• FF3: Verified Account

• FF8-1-04: Verified Account Codes with TRS (Call Barring) Class

Considerations

• Account codes are not available during conversation recording mode for the Built-In Voice Mail.

• Even though up to 10 digits may be entered, the system verifies the ID based on the first 4 digits only.

• Account codes will be cancelled after using trunk queuing.-

• Account codes are not available for a Dial Pulse SLT.

• SLT telephones can only use account codes with outgoing calls only.

• Account Codes interact with TRS (Call Barring) as shown in the following table:

Forced or Not Forced

Not Forced

Forced

Verified or

Non-Verified

Non-Verified

Verified

Non-Verified

Verified

TRS (Call Barring) Class

No Account Entry Account Entry

Extension Port Based TRS

Class

TRS (Call Barring) Class for Forced Account Code

(FF1 0 19 0001)

Extension Port Based TRS

(Call Barring) Class

Account Code Based TRS

(Call Barring) Class

Extension Port Based TRS

(Call Barring) Class

Account Code Based TRS

(Call Barring) Class

274 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

Attendant Group Calls

Description

You can call the attendant group from any extension by dialling the designated attendant number.

Operation

To call an attendant group:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the attendant pilot number (default = 0 [UK/HK] or 9

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF3-0: Extension Number

• FF5-0: Attendant Hunt Groups

Considerations

• Up to 20 extensions can be included in an attendant group.

• The attendant pilot number is flexible.

• If a member of an attendant group is for a virtual extension, multiple extensions in the attendant group can be made to ring at once when the virtual number is dialled.

• Attendant calls are always tone calls (i.e., not voice calls).

Busy Override

Description

Busy Override allows you to break into another user’s outside or intercom calls to relay urgent information or to create three-party conference calls.

Operation

To set Extension Busy Override:

1. Lift the handset.

Action Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 275

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Action

2. Dial the extension number.

3. Enter the Busy Override code (default = 9 [UK/HK] or 9#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Busy tone

• Alert tone sounds to both extensions

(System programming required)

• Connection to both parties

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-01: Splash Tone (Busy Override)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF3: Extension COS

• FF3: Data Security

Considerations

• You cannot break in on three-party conference calls.

• The default for the override alert tone is off. If the override alert tone is enabled, the tone will be sent to both parties when a call is overridden.

Callback Request

Description

If you dial a busy extension, you can have the System call you back when that extension becomes free. When you answer, the System automatically rings the called party again.

Operation

To set a Callback Request:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or

3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Replace the handset after you hear the ringback tone.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

Ringback tone

System calls back when called extension becomes free

276 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

To respond to the callback request:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

Chapter 7. SLT Features

Result

System automatically redials extension

To cancel a Callback Request:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the Callback cancellation code (default = 769 [UK/HK] or 769# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset .

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Send)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Callback Request Receive)

• FF3-0: Extension COS

• FF1-2-03: Dial Plan (Callback Cancel)

Considerations

• N/A

Call Forwarding

Description

Call Forwarding allows you to send your calls to another extension, to an outside line, or to voice mail. Call Forwarding can be set or cancelled under the following conditions from either your own extension or from an alternate extension:

• Call Forwarding - All Calls

• Call Forwarding - Busy

• Call Forwarding - No Answer

Call Forwarding - All Calls

When Call Forwarding - All Calls is set, all incoming calls to an extension are immediately forwarded.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 277

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To set Call Forwarding - All Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 721 (UK/HK) or 721# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.

4. Enter the destination number:

• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension number.

• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then enter the SSD bin number.

Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instruc-

tions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 276.)

5. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To cancel Call Forwarding - All Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 731 (UK/HK) or 731# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 751 (UK/HK) or 751# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, enter the extension number.

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call Forwarding - Busy

When Call Forwarding - Busy is set, all incoming calls to a busy extension are forwarded.

278 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

To set Call Forwarding - Busy:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 722 (UK/HK) or 722# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 742 (UK/HK) or 742# (Taiwan, Malaysia, indonesia).

3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the number of the extension whose calls you want to forward.

4. Enter the destination number:

• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension number.

• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then enter the SSD bin number.

Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instruc-

tions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 276.)

5. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To cancel Call Forwarding - Busy:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 732 (UK/HK) or 732# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 752 (UK/HK) or 752# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call Forwarding - No Answer

When Call Forwarding - No Answer is set, a call will ring until the Call forward No Answer timer expires. When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 279

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

To set Call Forwarding - No Answer:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the appropriate Set Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 723 (UK/HK) or 723# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia).

• For another extension, enter 743 (UK/HK) or 743# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If setting Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the number of the extension whose calls you wish to forward.

4. Dial the destination number:

• If forwarding to another extension, dial the extension number.

• If forwarding to an outside number, press the # key then enter the SSD bin number.

Note: Any outside number used for Call Forwarding must already be programmed into speed dialling. (For instruc-

tions, see “Speed Dialling” on page 276.)

5. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To cancel Call Forwarding - No Answer:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the appropriate Cancel Call Forwarding code:

• For your extension, enter 733 (UK/HK) or 733# (Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia].

• For another extension, enter 753 (UK/HK) or 753# (Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia).

3. If cancelling Call Forwarding for another extension, dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb

The System allows you to cancel both Call Forwarding and Do-Not-Disturb (DND) for your own extension in one step.

To cancel Call Forwarding and DND:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

280 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

Action

2. Enter the CF/DND All Clear code (default = 7**).

3. Replace the handset.

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/All Calls)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Busy)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/No Answer)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Call Forward/Other)

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF3-0: Extension COS Assignment

Considerations

• Calls cannot be forwarded to an extension that already has Call Forwarding or DND activated.

For example, extension 220 can only forward to extension 225 if 225 is not forwarded.

• Call Forwarding - Busy and Call Forwarding - No Answer can both be set at the same time.

• You can cancel both Call Forwarding and DND by entering 7 * *.

• An auto camp-on to a busy extension will forward to the Call Forward No Answer destination. A manual camp-on to a busy extension will not forward.

• If Call Forwarding No Answer and DND are both set, calls immediately forward to the Call

Forward No Answer destination.

Call Hold

Description

The system provides the following types of Call Hold:

• System Hold

• Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)

• Exclusive Hold

• Broker’s Hold

• Call Park (Station)

System Hold

You can place either an outside or intercom call on System Hold. You can retrieve a call placed on

System Hold from any extension that has a line appearance for the held call.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 281

Chapter 7. SLT Features

Operation

To place a call on System Hold:

Action

1. While on a call, hookflash.

To retrieve a call placed on System Hold:

1. If onhook, go offhook.

2. Hookflash.

Action

Section 700 - Operation

Result

Intercom dial tone

Result

Intercom dial tone

Retrieve call

To retrieve a held call on a specific trunk:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Specified Trunk Answer code (default = *0).

3. Enter the trunk number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Operation for SLT)

• FF3-0: Extension COS

Considerations

• N/A

Floating Hold (Retrieve Only)

Floating Hold allows calls to be placed in a hold orbit (position) for retrieval elsewhere in the system.

Floating Hold is most commonly used by the attendant group when they are unable to locate the desired party. If the desired party does not answer his/her phone, the attendant places the caller on

Floating Hold and asks over the paging system that the desired party dial *9XXX to retrieve the held call.

Note:

Single Line Telephone (SLT) positions are not able to place a call on Floating Hold. However, an SLT can retrieve a call on floating.

282 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To retrieve a call from Floating Hold:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter *9 followed by the Floating Hold Orbit number (001-

576 (CPC-288/576), 01-96 (CPC-96) or 001-099 (CPC288/

576) or 01-09 (CPC-96) (See considerations below.)

Chapter 7. SLT Features

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF1-0-02: Dial Control for Floating Hold Answer.

Considerations

• The number of floating hold orbits available may very depending on the Station Park/Floating

Hold Pickup setting (FF1-0-02-0025). The station park pickup access code can set to *9

(default). The “*9” access code operates as follows:

System Size

96

Above 96

Virtual Line Number and Operation

01-09 Floating Hold pick up

10-96: Station Park Hold pick up purpose

001-099 Floating Hold pick up

100-576: Station Park Hold pick up purpose

Exclusive Hold

With Exclusive Hold, only the extension that held the call can retrieve it. Exclusive Hold can be used to hold trunk calls and extension calls.

Operation

To place a call on Exclusive Hold:

Action

1. While on a call, hookflash.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To retrieve a call from Exclusive Hold:

Action

1. If onhook, lift the handset.

2. Hookflash.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000

Result

283

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Control on SLTs)

Considerations

• Intercom calls will be held as Exclusive.

Broker’s Hold

Broker’s Hold allows you to toggle between the current call and the last held call by hookflash.

Operation

To place a call on Broker’s Hold:

1. Pick up the first call.

2. Hookflash.

3. Pick up the second call.

4. Hookflash.

Action

First call on hold

Result

Second call on hold, first call retrieved

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• F1-0-03: Extension COS (Hookflash Control on SLTs - Broker’s Hold or Conference)

• FF3: Extension COS

Considerations

• If Broker’s Hold is enabled, it is not possible to establish a conference call from an SLT position.

Call Park

You can use the Call Park function to transfer a call, even if you cannot locate the intended recipient of the call.

Trunk, extension, and network calls may be parked.

There are two ways for an extension to park a call on the ICX. One way is to park the call at the receiving extension and to retrieve the parked call at another extension by dialling the park answer code plus the parking extension number. The other way is to park the call at another extension and dial the park transfer answer code at the other extension to retrieve the call. In Version 5.0, an Extension

Group Pickup code allows the user to pick up a Transfer Recall (only on non-appearing calls), a Hold

Recall, and a Station Park Recall.

284 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

To park a call on this extension:

Action

1. While on a call, press the hookswitch.

2. Enter the Call Park Hold access code (default = 771 [UK/

HK] or 771# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.

Result

• Intercom dial tone

To retrieve a call parked at the originating extension from another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset

Enter the Call Park Answer/Other Ext. access code (default

= 773 [UK/HK] or 773# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

OR...

Enter the Call Park/Floating Hold Answer feature access code (default = *9).

2. Dial the number of the extension that parked the call.

Result

Intercom dial tone

• Connected to parked call

To park a call at another extension:

Action

1. While on a call, press the hookswitch.

2. Enter the Call Park Transfer access code (default = 774

[UK/HK] or 774# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number to receive the parked call.

4. If necessary, page the party that needs to retrieve the call.

Result

• Intercom dial tone

To retrieve a transferred call park:

Action

1. At the extension with the transferred park call, lift the handset.

2. Enter Call Park Answer/Self access code (default = 772

[UK/HK] or 772# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

• Connected to parked call

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1 (System): Extension Park Hold Recall Timer

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 285

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

• FF1-0-02: Dial Control for Floating Hold Answer

Considerations

• You cannot park more than one call at a time.

• If two calls are on hold and the last call is parked, the other call is then considered the last held call. If a transfer is performed, the remaining held call would be the call transferred, not the parked call.

Call Pickup

Description

The System allows the following types of call pickup:

• Extension Group Pickup

• Extension Direct Pickup

• Trunk Group Pickup

• Trunk Direct Pickup

Extension Group Pickup

Extension Group Pickup allows you to pick up a direct ringing call (within your extension pickup group or in a different pickup group) without having to dial the number of the ringing extension.

Three types of Extension Group Pickup are available:

Call Pickup - All Calls: You can pick up a call ringing anywhere within your own extension group.

Call Pickup - External Calls: You can pick up only external calls ringing within your own extension group.

Specified Group Pickup: You can pick up a call ringing to an extension in another extension group.

Operation

To use Extension Group Pickup - All Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - All Calls code (default

= 701 [UK/HK] or 701# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Complete the call and replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

286 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

To use Extension Group Pickup - External Calls:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Extension Group Pickup - External Calls code

(default = 702 [UK/HK] or 702# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Complete the call and replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To use Specified Group Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Specified Group Pickup code (default = 703 [UK/

HK] or 703# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the number of the call pickup group (01-72) where the call is ringing.

4. Complete the call and replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF3: Call Pickup Group Assignment

Considerations

• Extension Group Pickup - 12 / CCU - maximum 72 group / 6 CCU configuration

Extension Direct Pickup

Extension Direct Pickup allows you to answer a call to another extension by dialling the number of the ringing extension.

Operation

To use Extension Direct Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Extension Direct Call Pickup code (default = 704

[UK/HK] or 704# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 287

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Action

3. Dial the number of the ringing extension.

4. Complete the call and replace the handset.

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-02: Intercom Voice Call Pickup

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

Considerations

• N/A

Trunk Group Pickup

Trunk Group Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing to any extension within your own MCO incoming trunk group.

Operation

To use Trunk Group Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Trunk Group Pickup code (default = 709 [UK/

HK] or 709# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Complete the call and replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF5-3: MCO Inbound Trunk Group Members

Considerations

• N/A

Trunk Direct Pickup

Trunk Direct Pickup allows you to answer calls ringing on a specific trunk number.

288 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

Operation

To use Trunk Direct Pickup:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Trunk Direct Pickup code (default = *0).

3. Dial the number of the ringing or holding (system) trunk.

4. Complete the call and replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

Considerations

• Calls on exclusive hold cannot be picked up.

Call Transfer

Description

The System allows you to transfer calls to either another extension or to an outside number. The transferred calls can be either supervised or unsupervised. (You can also use the Camp-on feature to transfer a call to a busy extension.)

Supervised Transfer

When completing a supervised transfer, the transferring party remains on the line until the third party answers, then he/she announces the call.

Operation

To supervise the transfer of a call to another extension:

Action

1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.

2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.

3. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.

4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 289

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

To supervise the transfer of a call to an outside number:

Action

1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.

2. Enter trunk access code.

3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.

4. When the call is answered, inform the third party of the transfer.

5. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Unsupervised Transfer

When completing an unsupervised transfer the transferring party hangs up before the third party answers.

Operation

To transfer a call to another extension without supervising the transfer:

Action

1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.

2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.

3. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To transfer a call to an outside number without supervising the transfer:

Action

1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.

2. Enter trunk access code.

3. Dial the number to which the call is to be transferred.

4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

290 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

Camping a Call Onto a Busy Extension

Operation

To camp a call onto a busy extension:

Action

1. While on a call, hookflash to place the call on hold.

2. Dial the extension number to which the call is to be transferred.

3. If your extension does not have Auto Camp-On activated, enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/

HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Complete the transfer by replacing the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Camp-on tone heard at called extension

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Ringback)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Talk)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Onhook Transfer at Camp-on)

Considerations

• On-Hook Transfer must be enabled for the transferring party’s Extension Class of Service

(COS).

• If the call is not answered by the third party before the Transfer Recall Timer expires, the call will recall to the transferring extension.

• If a Transfer Recall is not answered before the Recall Duration Timer expires, the call will revert to the Attendant group.

• If the called party does not exist, the call recalls to the transferring extension.

• You cannot transfer a call to an extension that has Do-Not-Disturb (DND) activated.

• You can transfer a call to an extension that has Call Forwarding activated. The transferred call will follow the call forwarding path of the extension it is transferred to. For example, if extension

221 is forwarded to extension 225, calls that are transferred to extension 221 will be forwarded to extension 225.

• Calls can be transferred from paging using supervised transfer.

Camp-On (Call Waiting)

Description

If you dial a busy extension, you can camp onto that extension and send a Call Waiting signal to the called party. The called party then needs only to replace the handset and pick it up again to be

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 291

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation automatically connected to the new call. The called party can also place the first call on hold by

Hookflashing and then answering the waiting call.

The System provides two types of call waiting:

Automatic Call Waiting: You do not need to enter a code to send the Call Waiting signal.

You need only to remain on the line.

Manual Call Waiting: You must enter a code to send a Call Waiting signal to the busy extension.

Operation

To use Automatic Camp-on:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the extension number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

• Called party hears alert tone

• Calling party hears ringback tone

3. Remain on the line until the called party answers.

To use Manual Camp-on:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. Enter the Camp-On (Call Waiting) code (default = 2 [UK/

HK] or 2# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Remain on the line until the called party answers.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

• Called party hears alert tone

• Calling party hears ringback tone

To answer a Camp-on (Call Waiting) signal:

Action

1. Replace the handset.

2. Lift the handset again to be connected to the waiting call.

OR....

Hookflash.

Result

• Current call placed on hold

• Connected to waiting call

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS

292 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

• FF3: Extension COS

Considerations

• You can transfer an outside call to a busy extension using Camp-on. See “To camp a call onto a busy extension:” on page 266.

Conference Calls

Description

Conference Calls allow you to add another party to an existing conversation. With the standard system configuration, up to 3 parties can be included in a conference call at any one time.

Note: The SLT does not support 8 party conference calling.

Any combination of extensions and trunk lines can be in the conference as long as the original extension is in the conference and the total number of parties does not exceed 3. Only one operation is used to establish and add to a conference. You simply have to place the current call on hold, dial the next party and press the CONF key. No different operation or access code is required to add additional parties to the call.

When no optional conference card is installed, the system supports the following types of three-party conference calls:

• 3 extensions

• 2 extensions and 1trunk

• 1 extension and 2 trunks

Operation

To establish a conference call:

Action

1. While on a call, hookflash to place your current call on hold.

2. If adding an outside party, dial a trunk access code (default

= 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

3. Dial the number of the party you wish to add to the call.

4. Hookflash when your call is answered.

5. To add additional parties, repeat steps 1-4

6. To drop out of the conference call, hang up.

Result

• Outside dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF3: Extension COS

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 293

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Considerations

• If all the internal parties hang up, the conference call will be disconnected. If the internal party remains in the conversation, the conference call remains in progress.

• When three parties are conferenced, a built-in 3-party conference circuit is used. If no 3-party conference circuit is available, a conference cannot be established.

Do-Not-Disturb (DND)

Description

You can make an extension unavailable by activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) feature. When DND is activated, calls to that extension receive busy tone.

You can set or cancel DND from either your extension or from an alternate extension.

Operation

To set DND for your own extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the DND Set code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or 720#

[Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To cancel DND for your own extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the DND Cancel code (default = 720 [UK/HK] or

720# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

DND/CD LED light goes off

294

To set DND for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the DND Set by Other Phone code (default = 740

[UK/HK] or 740# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number

.

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

To cancel DND for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the DND Cancel by Other Phone code (default = 750

[UK/HK] or 750# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number.

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Manual DND Override Send)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Forced DND Override)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (DND Set/Clear Other)

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF3-0: Extension COS

Considerations

• Forced DND override is available.

• DND override function is available by Busy Override code.

Flash Send

Description

Flash send allows you to send a flash to a trunk.

Operation

To send a flash on an trunk:

Action

1. Hookflash to place the current trunk call on hold.

2. Enter the SLT Flash Send access code (default = 765).

Result

Dial tone is returned

A flash is sent on the trunk. The trunk will respond according.

Related Programming

• N/A

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 295

Chapter 7. SLT Features

Related Programming

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF5-5: Hot Line

Considerations

• N/A

Section 700 - Operation

Hot Line

Description

Hot Line enables you to immediately connect to another pre-assigned extension or speed dial number simply by lifting the handset. You do not have to dial any digits.

Operation

To immediately connect to a pre-assigned extension or speed dial number:

1. Lift the handset.

Action Result

Automatically connected to pre-assigned extension or speed dial number

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF5-5: Hot Line

Considerations

• N/A

Intercom Calling

Description

The System provides two methods of intercom calling:

Voice Calling: Extension calls are connected immediately, without a ringing tone.

Tone Calling: A ringing tone is sent to the called extension.

Extension Class of Service (COS) programming determines whether the default for the originating extension is voice or tone calling. Regardless of the default, you can toggle between voice or tone calling by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature code. For example, if the extension default is tone

296 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features calling, you can make a voice call to another extension by entering the Tone-Voice Call feature access code.

Operation

To make a call using Intercom Calling:

Result

Intercom dial tone

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. If your extension is set for tone calling and you want to make a voice call, enter 1.

Or, if your extension is set for voice call and you want to make a tone call, enter 1.

4. Speak when your call is answered

5. Replace the handset.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Calling Type)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Send)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Voice Call Receive)

• FF3: Extension COS

Considerations

• Both the called and calling parties must belong to an Extension COS that allows Voice Calling.

• You cannot change from voice calling to tone calling.

Last Number Redial

Description

Last Number Redial allows you to automatically redial the last number dialled.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 297

Chapter 7. SLT Features

Operation

To automatically redial the last number dialled:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the SLT Redial feature code (default = 712 [UK/HK] or 712# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Complete the call and replace the handset.

Section 700 - Operation

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Intercom Redialing)

• FF3: Extension COS

Considerations

• Extension Class of Service (COS) determines whether Last Number Redial can be used for both intercom and trunk calls or trunk calls only.

Message Waiting/Callback

Description

If you try to call an extension that is busy or does not answer, you can leave a message wait indication at that extension, requesting a return call.

Operation

To leave a message waiting indication:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. While the telephone is still ringing, or when you hear the busy tone, enter the Message Wait Set code (default = 4

[UK/HK] or 4# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Ring or busy tone

298 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

To answer a message waiting indication (Callback):

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Message Wait Callback code (default = *6).

Result

Stutter dial tone

Telephone automatically dials extension that set Message Waiting Indication

To cancel a Callback Message:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Callback Request Cancel code (default = *5).

3. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Message Wait set/cancel)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Priority Message Wait set/cancel)

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF3: Extension COS

Considerations

• The System has priority message waiting for 3rd-party voice mail. See “Voice Mail Integration

(Third Party)” on page 69.

Offhook Signalling

Description

Offhook Signalling sends a tone over the handset to a busy extension to indicate that a trunk call has arrived or a call is camped-on. Prior to Version 5.0, users receiving an offhook signal during a conversation had to end the call before answering an incoming call. Beginning with Version 5.0, users receiving an offhook signal during conversation can press and release the hook (hookflash) to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.

After receiving an offhook signal during a call:

Action

1. Complete the first call and place the handset on hook.

2. After the telephone rings, go off hook.

Result

First call is terminated.

Incoming call is answered.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 299

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

OR

Action

1. Press and release the hook quickly (hookflash).

Result

First call is placed on hold; incoming call connects.

First call connects again. 2. Press and release the hook quickly to go back to the original call.

NOTE: The steps outlined above can be performed only when the necessary settings have been programmed into the system.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF3: Trunk Off-Hook Signal

• FF1-1: Off-Hook Signal Timer

Considerations

• The trunk call type may be either multiple ring, or DDI/DIL whose destination is set to Auto camp-on (Call Waiting).

• Offhook signalling is not supported for an ISDN terminal.

• The System does not send the offhook signal under the following conditions:

• During a conference call

• During an OHVA or Busy Override

• Data Privacy is enabled

• Receiving telephone is a 3rd party voice mail.

Offhook Voice Announce

Description

You can interrupt a busy extension when making an Intercom Call, and then use the Off-Hook Voice

Announce (OHVA) feature to make an announcement.

Operation

To make an OHVA :

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial the extension number.

3. Enter the OHVA feature access code (default = 8 [UK/HK] or 8# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Make your announcement

Busy signal

Result

300 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Originate

• FF1 0 03 (System): Extension COS OHVA Receive

• FF3 (Extension): Extension COS Assignments

• FF4: FF Key Assignment

Considerations

• If On hook Transfer is enabled, the held call is transferred as soon as the extension sending the

OHVA hangs up.

• You cannot receive a Call Waiting message during an OHVA.

• If you make an OHVA to an SLT, the SLT user and the other party will hear the announcement.

Paging

Description

The System allows you to make both internal and external pages and announcements. Internal pages are made via the System’s key telephone speakers. External pages are made through the speakers of an external paging system connected to the System.

Paging calls can be answered from any extension using the Meet-Me Answer feature.

Operation

To make a page:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Group Paging code (default = #).

3. Enter the number of the desired Paging group (0-9).

4. Make your announcement.

5. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Meet-Me Answer

To answer a page using Meet-Me Answer:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Meet Me Answer code (default = ##).

ICX-50-700

Result

Intercom dial tone

Connected to specified party

ICX (International) issued June 2000 301

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Hardware Requirements

• External relays, amplifier, and speakers are required for external paging.

Related Programming

• FF1-0-02: Paging Override

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Paging)

• FF1-0-04: Trunk COS (Paging)

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF2: Trunk COS

• FF3: Extension COS

Considerations

• If an external paging system has been connected, pages can be made to Paging groups 0-9 through the external speakers. Voice paging can also be heard over the extensions in groups 0-9.

• An extension can belong to more than one paging group.

• Only one page may be performed at a time. If you attempt to make a page while another extension is paging, you will receive a busy signal unless your system allows Paging Override.

• Beginning with Version 4.5 and higher, the paging system can be set to “timeout” if a page remains unanswered for a specified length of time (0 to 255 seconds). If this feature is set and the timeout period has elapsed, the page originator’s handset will emit a Fast Busy Tone.

Room Monitoring

Version 4.0 and higher

Description

This feature allows the user to monitor the sounds in a room from another extension or room. The transmitter in the telephone handset is used as a remote “microphone” for monitoring these sounds.

To activate this feature, the monitored extension must enable the Room Monitor feature before the monitoring extension can listen to the sounds in the room. The monitored extension can be enabled using an SLT, DSLT, or Key Telephone. No special programming is required to allow an extension to enable the monitored mode.

Operation

To set up the monitored extension:

Action

1. Dial the monitored extension access code (default 775)

Note:

The handset must be off-hook to activate the

Room Monitor feature.

Result

You will hear a confirmation tone after the monitored extension has enabled the

Room Monitor feature.

302 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

When a monitored extension receives a call, the caller hears a busy tone. Additional operations may be performed from the monitored extension when it is in monitored mode:

Action

1. Placing the handset back on-hook

2. Pressing digits 0-9, *, #

3. FL/R

Result

Monitored mode is cancelled. Extension returns to idle.

No response is given. Extension remains in monitored mode.

Monitored mode is cancelled. Dial tone is returned to handset.

It is not possible to monitor an extension from an SLT telephone.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Allow/deny Busy Override Send—Monitoring extension)

• FF1-2-02: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 1

• FF1-2-03: Dial Plan at DT Pattern 2

Considerations

• Be sure all phones that should NOT be allowed to monitor have a COS that restricts monitoring.

• If the monitored extension is placed on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitoring extension will hear a fast busy tone.

• If the monitoring extension goes on-hook while Room Monitoring is activated, the monitored extension will remain in the monitored mode, and can be accessed by any other extension allowed to access the room monitoring mode.

• A room cannot be monitored from more than one extension at a time. If an attempt is made to monitor an extension while the extension is being monitored, the user will hear a fast busy tone.

• ISDN (s-point) extensions cannot access the Room Monitor feature in either the monitor or monitored modes.

• A monitoring extension cannot forward a call on hold to a monitored extension.

• A monitored extension cannot receive a transferred call.

Speed Dialling

Description

The System supports the following speed dial features:

• Personal Speed Dial (PSD)

• System Speed Dial (SSD)

• Speed Dial Linking

• Speed Dial Name Assignment

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 303

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Personal Speed Dial

You can store frequently called numbers using the PSD feature. Up to 20 PSD numbers can be stored in PSD bins numbered 80-99.

Operation

To assign PSD numbers:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/

HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

4. Dial the number.

5. Hookflash.

6. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To dial a PSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. If necessary, access an outside line.

3. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).

4. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

5. Complete the call and replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Outside dial tone

To delete a PSD number:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/

HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the PSD bin number (80-99).

4. Hookflash.

5. Complete the call and replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

304 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

• N/A

Considerations

• Storing a new number erases any previously stored data.

• Speed Dial numbers can contain up to 24 characters.

• Single Line Telephone (SLT) can only enter 0, 1-9, *, and #. If a pause, MCO code, intercom level, Dial Pulse (DP) - Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) code, or SSD code needs to be programmed, use User Maintenance to program the speed dial.

System Speed Dial

You can store frequently called numbers using the SSD feature. Either 80 or 800 SSD numbers can be programmed, depending on how the System is configured. In an 80 SSD-number system, the SSD numbers are stored in bins 00-79. In 800 SSD-number systems, the SSD numbers are stored in bins

000-799.

Operation

To assign SSD numbers:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/

HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

4. Dial the phone number.

5. Hookflash.

6. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To dial an SSD number by entering the speed dial bin number:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. If necessary, access an outside line.

3. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).

4. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

5. Complete the call and replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Outside dial tone

To delete an SSD number:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Speed Dial Set/Clear code (default = 710 [UK/

HK] or 710# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 305

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Action

3. Enter the SSD bin number (00-79 or 000-799).

4. Hookflash.

5. Replace the handset.

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-15, 16, & 17 SSD Blocks

• FF1-0-02 SSD Digits

• FF1-0-03 Extension COS (SSD Assignment)

• FF8-1-02: SSD Number

• FF8-1-02: SSD Name

Considerations

• The system can be programmed to allow SSD Numbers to override toll restrictions.

Speed Dial Linking

You can automatically link together up to 6 SSD numbers in 1 PSD bin to handle telephone numbers longer than 24 characters.

Alternatively, any combination of PSDs and SSDs can be manually linked together by pressing the keys in the desired sequence. This can be useful for prepending account codes or long distance carrier access codes, etc.

Operation

To use a PSD that links multiple SSDs:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

1. If necessary, access an outside line.

2. Enter the Speed Dial Originate code (default = 80).

3. Enter the desired PSD bin number (80-99).

4. Complete the call and replace the handset.

Outside dial tone

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• N/A

Considerations

306 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

• N/A

Chapter 7. SLT Features

Station Lockout

Version 3.0 and higher

Description

Use the Station Lockout feature to limit use of your phone by others when you are away from your telephone. When the Station Lockout feature is in use, the Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call

Barring) Class of your telephone is changed. Anyone using your telephone is limited to the calling abilities defined by this Lockout TRS (Call Barring) Class.

In addition, with the appropriate COS, you can set or cancel Station Lockout for other telephones.

To activate Station Lockout feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Station Lockout feature code (default = 746 [UK/

HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To cancel Station Lockout feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel feature code (default =

746 [UK/HK] or 746# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To activate Station Lockout feature for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Station Lockout Set for another extension feature code (default = 747 [UK/HK] or 747# [Taiwan, Malaysia,

Indonesia]) .

3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 307

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

To cancel Station Lockout feature for another extension:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Station Lockout Cancel for another extension feature code (default = 748 [UK/HK] or 748# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Dial the extension number to activate station lockout.

4. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

5. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To change the Station Lockout security code:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout

Security Code Change code (default = 749 [UK/HK] or

749# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

3. Enter the current Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

4. Enter the new Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout security code.

5. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Related Programming

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Station Lockout Enable/Disable)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Station Lockout for another Extension Enable/Disable)

• FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout Code)

• FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout other Extensions Code)

• FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Station Lockout Cancel other Extensions Code)

• FF1-2-02: Feature Codes (Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout Security Code Changing

Code)

• FF1-0-19: TRS (Call Barring) Class Under Station Lockout

• FF8-1-08: Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout Security Code

Considerations

• Walking TRS (Call Barring) and Station Lockout use the same security code.

• You cannot override station lockout using Walking TRS (Call Barring) feature.

• If you enter an incorrect key code and then try to dial, the phone will issue a busy tone.

308 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

• If station lockout is set, the phone is limited to the Station Lockout TRS (Call Barring) Class outside calling abilities. This TRS (Call Barring) Class should be carefully selected to only allow the desired call types.

• Without Walking TRS (Call Barring)/Station Lockout Security Code, you cannot set the Station

Lockout feature.

Step Call (Reset Call)

Description

If you dial a busy extension, the System allows you to quickly dial another extension by simply pressing the last digit of the new extension number.

Operation

To use Step Call (Reset Call) to dial another extension (after a busy extension):

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Dial an extension.

3. Enter the last digit of the next extension.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

Example: You dial extension 213, but it is busy. To dial extension 214, enter 4.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

Considerations

• The second extension called using the Step Call (Reset Call) feature must have the same number of digits as the first extension.

Timed Reminder Call

Description

Your telephone can act as an alarm clock with the Timed Reminder Call feature.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 309

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Operation

To set the Timed Reminder Call feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Timed Reminder Set code (default = *31).

3. Enter the time you want the Timed Reminder Call to sound.

(Enter the time in 24-hour format. For example, 0100 for 1

AM, 1300 for 1 PM).

4. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

To cancel the Timed Reminder Call feature:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Timed Reminder Cancel code (default = *39).

3. Replace the handset.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• N/A

Considerations

• An alarm tone (default = 60 seconds) will be issued at the specified time.

• An extension can have only one Reminder Call set at a time.

• To change the Reminder Call, simply enter a new time.

• If the extension is in use when the reminder call is scheduled, the reminder call is issued 3 minutes later.

Trunk Access

Description

The System supports the following ways to seize an idle trunk to make an outside call:

• Direct Trunk Access

• MCO Trunk Access

310 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

Direct Trunk Access

Extensions can seize a specific trunk for outgoing calls. Extensions can also use Direct Trunk Access to test trunks or to access data trunks.

Operation

To use Direct Trunk Access:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the Direct Trunk Access code (default = 88).

3. Enter the desired trunk number.

4. Dial the phone number.

Outside dial tone

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Direct Trunk Access)

• FF3: Extension COS

Considerations

• N/A

MCO Trunk Access

The System supports up to 5 MCO groups for each MCO tenant group. You can seize an idle trunk from the MCO trunk group by entering the MCO access code.

Operation

To seize an idle trunk:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the desired trunk access number (9 [UK/HK], 0 [Tai-

wan, Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84). (See Table 24 on page

312.)

3. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Outside dial tone

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1: MCO Access

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 311

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

• FF5-2: MCO Trunk Group (Outbound)

• FF7: ARS/TRS (Call Barring)

Considerations

• The System supports up to 576 outside lines in a six-CCU configuration. These lines can be divided into 99 different trunk groups.

• Each trunk group can support up to 50 outside lines.

• Each MCO Tenant Group can have up to 5 MCO trunk access codes. System defaults for MCO trunk access codes are displayed in the following table.

• MCO1 can have up to 5 trunk groups assigned by the Advanced Trunk Group feature.

• MCO1 access code is used for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) access code.

Table 24. MCO Trunk Access Codes

MCO Group

MCO1

MCO2

MCO3

MCO4

MCO5

Trunk Access Code

9

(UK/HK) or

0

(Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia)

81

82

83

84

Trunk Queuing

Description

When you try to originate a call by MCO (enter 9 [UK/HK] or 0 [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]) and all outside lines in a trunk group are busy, the System can call you when a line becomes free. Simply pick up the handset and dial the telephone number when the Trunk Callback alert tone rings.

Operation

To set Trunk Queuing:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter trunk access code.

3. Enter the Callback Request code (default = 3 [UK/HK] or

3# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

4. Replace the handset.

5. Wait for the Trunk Callback alert tone.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Busy tone

312 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

To respond to the Trunk Callback alert tone:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

Chapter 7. SLT Features

Outside dial tone

Result

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF1-2: Dial Plan

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (Trunk Queuing)

• FF3: Extension COS

Considerations

• Response to the Trunk Callback must be within 15 seconds or Trunk Queuing will be cancelled.

• The Trunk Queuing feature may also be used if you hear a busy tone when trying to make a call using the MCO Trunk Access feature.

Universal Night Answer to Page

Description

During night mode, Universal Night Answer (UNA) sends incoming calls for selected trunks to ring external paging speakers.

UNA calls can be picked up from any extension, provided the extension’s Class of Service (COS) allows UNA answer.

Operation

To answer a UNA call:

Action

1. Lift the handset.

2. Enter the UNA to Page Pickup code (default = 705 [UK/

HK] or 705# [Taiwan, Malaysia, Indonesia]).

Result

Intercom dial tone

Call is received.

Related Programming

• FF2-0: Trunk Ring Assignments

• FF1-2: Dial Plan (UNA Pickup Code)

• FF1-0-03: Extension COS (UNA Pickup)

• FF3: Extension COS

• FF3: Extension (External Ring Extension Number)

• FF1-0-27: System (UNA Ringing Port by Tenant Group)

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 313

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

Hardware Requirements

• External paging speakers and associated equipment are not provided with the ICX; they must be purchased separately.

Considerations

• The UNA Ringing port can be specified by tenant group or by trunk ring assignment.

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service

Description

Walking Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring) Class of Service (COS) allows an extension user to “carry” his or her toll restrictions to another phone.

Before the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS feature can be used, a Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code must be entered at your extension before using dialling privileges at another extension.

Operation

To use a Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code:

Action

1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF key of an extension other than your own.

2. Enter the Walking TRS (Call Barring) Access code (default

= 87).

3. Dial your extension number.

4. Enter your Walking TRS COS code (0001-9999)

5. Enter a trunk access code (default = 9 [UK/HK], 0 [Taiwan,

Malaysia, Indonesia], or 81-84).

6. Dial the phone number.

Result

Intercom dial tone

Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS remains in effect until you replace the handset.

7. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF key.

Hardware Requirements

• N/A

Related Programming

• FF8-1-08: Walking Class of Service Code

Considerations

• The same Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code can be used on more than one extension.

• Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS mode is kept until the user goes on-hook.

• ARS and TRS (Call Barring) dialling privileges follow the Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS.

314 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Chapter 7. SLT Features

• Before entering a new Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS code, you must first clear the existing code.

• When Walking TRS (Call Barring) COS is used, Wxxxx (where xxxx is the user’s extension number) appears in Call Logging.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued June 2000 315

Chapter 7. SLT Features Section 700 - Operation

316 ICX (International) issued June 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Appendix A: SBS/VB-9 A-Series

Telephone Features

In addition to the Key Telephone, DSLT, and SLT, SBS/VB-9 A Series phones may also be used. While most the features available on the Key Telephone, DSLT, and SLT are also available on the SBS/VB-9 A-Series telephones, there are a few differences. These differences are listed below:

Feature

Absence Messages

Differences for SBS/VB-9 A-Series Telephones

Absence message can be received only on display telephones.

Account Codes

Non-Verified Account Codes

Verified Account Codes

Attendant Group Calls

Auto Repeat Dial

Background Music

Busy Override

Callback Request

Call Forwarding

Call Forwarding - All Calls

Call Forwarding - Busy

Call Forwarding - No Answer

Call Forwarding - All Call and Do Not Disturb

Call Hold

System Hold

Floating Hold

Exclusive Hold

Brokers Hold

Call Park

Call Hold

Extension Group Pickup

Extension Direct Pickup

Trunk (Exchange Line) Group Pickup

Trunk (Exchange Line) Direct Pickup

Call Transfer

Supervised Transfer

Unsupervised Transfer

Camping a Call onto a Busy Extension

Caller ID Call Log

Camp-on (Call Waiting)

Conference Calls

Not Available

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 317

Section 700 - Operation

318

Feature

Directory Numbers

Display Information

7-Segment Display Phones

Small Display Phone

Changing the Display’s Contrast

Do-Not-Disturb

DP to DTMF Signal Conversion

Flash

Differences for SBS/VB-9 A-Series Telephones

Not available on A-Series telephones.

Flexible Function Keys

Flash key is not available on A-series phone.

Recall button and A-series telephone (UK only) send the same Flash signal when the Exchange/MCO key is pressed while in conversation.

CONF, PROG, and RECALL keys are not available on A-series phones. These functions are assigned on

FF keys.

A-series key phones do not support this feature.

Handsfree Answerback

Handsfree Operation

Headset Operation

When the VB-2394 Headset Adapter is connected, the

TW version A-series telephone requires the Headset

Adapter (VB-5331) to switch to the headset mode.

This feature is not available with A-Series key | telephones.

Hot Dial Pad

Hot Line

Intercom Calling

Last Number Redial

Line Appearances

DSS/BLF Appearances

Direct In-Line Appearances

Multi-Exchange Line (MCO) Appearances

Message Key

Message Waiting/Callback

Mute Function

Offhook Monitor

Offhook Signaling

Offhook Voice Announce

One-Touch Keys

On-hook Dialing

Paging

Meet-Me Answer

Ringing Line Preferences

Speed Dialing

Personal Speed Dial

System Speed Dial

Not available.

This feature is available only when using alphanumeric telephones.

ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Feature

Speed Dial Linking

Speed Dial Name Assignments

Station Lockout

Step Call (Reset Call)

Timed Reminder Call

Trunk (Exchange Line) Access

Trunk (Exchange Line) Key Access

Direct (Exchange Line) Access

MCO Line Preference

MCO Trunk (Exchange Line) Access

Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing

Universal Night Answer to Page

Volume Control

Walking TRS (Call Bearing) Class of Service

Zip Mode

Differences for SBS/VB-9 A-Series Telephones

This feature is available only when using alphanumeric telephones.

Depends on the key phone, and whether the maximum exchanges available to assign FF keys are different.

A-series telephones have a slide switch. The SBS/VB-

9 telephone has Volume Up/Down key.

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000 319

Section 700 - Operation

320 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

INDEX

A

About User Programming

79

Absence Message

120

DSLT

219

Key Telephone

120

Message No. and Text

Key Telephone

121

SLT

271

Absence message

key telephone

120

Absence Messages

Setting

80

Access Codes

MCO Trunk

DSLT

264

Key Telephone

208

SLT

312

Account Codes

DSLT

221

Key Telephone

122

Non-Verified

Key Telephone

123

SLT

273

Non-Verified ID

DSLT

222

SLT

272

Verified ID

DSLT

222

Key Telephone

123

SLT

273

ACD (Automatic Call Distributor)

25

AEC Disconnet

24

Alarm Ringing

63

Alpha Tagging

Caller ID

30

Analog Device Capability

Extension Interface

44

ANSWER Key

164

Answer Supervision for Voice Mail (Third Party)

72

Architecture

Non-Blocking

58

ARS (Automatic Route Selection)

26

A-Series Telephones

317

Attendant

Attendant Reversion

56

Attendant Group Calls

DSLT

223

Key Telephone

124

SLT

275

Attendant Groups

24

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000

Auto Repeat Dial

DSLT

224

Key Telephone

125

Automatic Call Distributor (ACD)

25

Automatic Call Waiting

Camp-on

DSLT

241

Key Telephone

149

SLT

292

Automatic Day/Night Mode

40

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

26

Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer

System

27

B

Background Music

DSLT

225

Key Telephone

126

System

27

Background Music/MOH Separation

System

27

Backup

Battery

27

Memory

49

Battery Backup

27

BGM/MOH Separation

27

Blocking Outgoing Audio

Mute Function

179

Broker’s Hold

DSLT

234

Key Telephone

135

SLT

284

Building Block Expansion Capability

28

Built-In Voice Mail Unit

28

Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Delayed Ringing

62

Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Ringing

62

Busy Override

DSLT

225

Key Telephone

127

SLT

275

C

Call Barring

Toll Restriction Service (TRS)

65

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service

314

Walking TRS Class of Service

214

Call Forward Busy Destination Extension

Setting

81

Call Forward ID Code

Voice Mail (Third Party)

72

321

Index

Call Forward ID Codes for Voice Mail

Setting

82

Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension

Setting

83

Call Forwarding

All Calls

DSLT

227

Key Telephone

129

SLT

277

Busy

DSLT

228

Key Telephone

130

SLT

278

Do-Not-Disturb

DSLT

230

Key Telephone

132

SLT

280

DSLT

227

Key Telephone

129

No Answer

DSLT

229

Key Telephone

131

SLT

279

SLT

277

Call Hold

Broker’s Hold

DSLT

234

Key Telephone

135

SLT

284

Call Park

DSLT

234

Key Telephone

136

SLT

284

DSLT

231

Exclusive Hold

DSLT

233

Key Telephone

135

SLT

283

Floating Hold

DSLT

232

Key Telephone

134

SLT

282

Key Telephone

133

SLT

281

System Hold

DSLT

231

Key Telephone

133

SLT

281

Call Logging

Output Format

64

SMDR

63

Priority of Incoming Call Condition Codes

64

Priority of Outgoing Call Condition Codes

63

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

63

Call Park

DSLT

234

Key Telephone

136

SLT

284

Call Pickup

DSLT

236

Extension Direct Pickup

DSLT

237

Key Telephone

140

SLT

287

Extension Group Pickup

DSLT

236

Key Telephone

139

SLT

286

Key Telephone

139

SLT

286

Trunk Direct Pickup

DSLT

238

Key Telephone

141

Trunk Group Pickup

DSLT

237

Key Telephone

140

SLT

288

Call Progress Tones

29

Call Records

SMDR

63

Call Routing

Network

56

Call Transfer

DSLT

239

Key Telephone

142

Network

56

SLT

289

Supervised

DSLT

239

Key Telephone

142

SLT

289

Unsupervised

DSLT

239

Key Telephone

143

SLT

290

Call Waiting

(Automatic) Camp-on

DSLT

241

Key Telephone

149

SLT

292

(Manual) Camp-on

DSLT

241

Key Telephone

149

SLT

292

Camp-on

DSLT

241

Key Telephone

149

SLT

291

322 ICX (International) issued October 2000

Section 700 - Operation

ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Index

Callback

Message Key

177

Message Waiting

DSLT

248

Key Telephone

178

SLT

298

Callback Request

DSLT

226

Key Telephone

128

SLT

276

Caller ID

Call Log

Key Telephone

144

Setting Logging Extensions

84

Caller ID Alpha Tagging

30

Caller ID Call Log

Key Telephone

144

Caller ID Logging Extensions

Setting

84

Calling

Network Extension

56, 57

Camping on Busy Extension

Call Transfer

DSLT

240

Key Telephone

143

SLT

291

Camp-on (Call Waiting)

Automatic

DSLT

241

Key Telephone

149

SLT

292

DSLT

241

Key Telephone

149

Manual

DSLT

241

Key Telephone

149

SLT

292

SLT

291

Centrex/PBX Compatibility

31

Changing Display Contrast

Display Information

159

Circular Hunt Group

47

Class of Service

Walking TRS

DSLT

266

Walking TRS (Call Barring)

Key Telephone

214

SLT

314

Class of Service - Ext/Ext Restriction

32

Class of Service - Extension (Station) Timers

35

Class of Service - Extension Feature

33

Class of Service - Trunk to Trunk Restriction

35

Class of Service - Trunk/Tie

32

Class of Service (COS)

31

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000

CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code (Third Party)

73

CO Trunk Interface - ISDN PRI

68

Compatibility

Centrex/PBX

31

Conference Calls

Busy Override

DSLT

225

Key Telephone

127

SLT

275

DSLT

242

Key Telephone

151

SLT

293

Connection

Tandem

58

Console

DSS/72

161

EM/24

162

COS

Extension

Enable/Disable Features

33

Trunk

Enable/Disable Features

32

COS - Ext/Ext Restriction

32

COS - Extension (Station) Timers

35

COS - Extension Feature

33

COS - Trunk to Trunk Restriction

35

COS - Trunk/Tie

32

COS (Class of Service)

31

Customizing Tool

60

D

Data Security

36

Date

Setting

107

Day

Setting

107

Day Mode

Automatic

40

Day, Day 2

37

Manual

37

Day of Week Mode

Addresses

87

Setting

85

Day Ringing

61

Day/Night Mode

Automatic

40

Manual

37

Day/Night System Mode

System

36

DDI Trunk Interface

67

Delayed Ringing

61

Devices

323

Index Section 700 - Operation

Programming

59

Dial Pad

Hot

Key Telephone

171

Dialling

Onhook

DSLT

251

Key Telephone

185

Digital Key Line Telephone (DSLT) Features

Attendant Group Calls

223

Digital Key Telephones

Extension Interface

43

Digital Pad

40

Digital Pad Class

40

Digital Single Line Telehphone (DSLT) Features

Conference Calls

242

Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT)

219

Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT) Features

Absence Message

219

Account Codes

221

Auto Repeat Dial

224

Background Music

225

Busy Override

225

Call Forwarding

227

Call Hold

231

Call Pickup

236

Call Transfer

239

Callback Request

226

Camp-on (Call Waiting)

241

Do-Not-Distrub (DND)

244

DP to DTMF Signal Conversion

245

Flash Signal

246

Hot Line

246

Intercom Calling

247

Last Number Redial

247

Message Waiting/Callback

248

Offhook Signalling

249

Offhook Voice Announce

250

Onhook Dialling

251

Paging

Meet-Me Answer

251

Speed Dialling

255

Step Call (Reset Call)

261

Timed Reminder

262

Trunk Access

263

Trunk Queuing

265

Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page

265

Walking TRS Class of Service

266

DIL Delayed Incoming Ring Enhancement

70

DIL Ringing

Distinguishing Between Incoming Calls

69

Direct Dial Inward (DDI) (DID) Day/Night Ringing

61

Direct Dial Inward (DDI) (DID) Delayed Ringing

62

Direct Dial Inward (DDI) Ringing

Ringing Types

68

Direct In Line Appearances

175

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

System

41

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ringing

Ringing Types

69

Direct Line (DL) Ringing

Ringing Types

DL

69

Direct Trunk Access

DSLT

263

Key Telephone

207

SLT

311

Directory Numbers

Key Telephone

153

DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

41

Disconnect Signal

Voice Mail (Third Party)

74

Display Information

Changing Display Contrast

159

Key Telephone

157

Large-Display Phone

158

Small-Display Phone

159

Distinctive Ringing

42

Distributed Hunt Group

46

DND (Do-Not-Disturb)

DSLT

244

Key Telephone

159

SLT

294

Do-Not-Distrub (DND)

DSLT

244

Key Telephone

159

Do-Not-Disturb

Call Forwarding

DSLT

230

Key Telephone

132

SLT

280

Do-Not-Disturb (DND)

SLT

294

Door box

Doorphone

42

Doorphone

42

Doorphone Sensor

43

DP

Signal Conversion

DSLT

245

Key Telephone

161

DP to DTMF Signal Conversion

DSLT

245

Key Telephone

161

DP/DTMF Single Line Telephones (SLTs)

Extension Interface

44

DSLT (Digital Single Line Telephone (DSLT)

Illustration

219

324 ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

DSLT Features

217

DSS/72 Console

161

DSS/BLF Appearances

174

DTMF

Signal Conversion

DSLT

245

Key Telephone

161

E

EM/24 Console

162

Exception Day Mode

Setting

87

Exclusive Hold

DSLT

233

Key Telephone

135

SLT

283

Expansion Capability

28

Extension

Set Call Forward Busy Destination

81

Set Call Forward No Answer Destination

83

Extension (Station) Timers

Class Assignment

35

Extension Calling

56, 57

Extension COS

Enable/Disable Features

33

Extension Direct Pickup

DSLT

237

Key Telephone

140

SLT

287

Extension Feature COS

33

Extension Group Pickup

All Calls

DSLT

236

Key Telephone

139

SLT

286

DSLT

236

External Calls

DSLT

236

Key Telephone

139

SLT

286

Key Telephone

139

SLT

286

Specified Group Pickup

DSLT

236

Key Telephone

139

SLT

286

Extension Inferface

Analog Device Capability

44

DP/DTMF Single Line Telephones (SLTs)

44

Extension Interface

43

Digital Key Telephones

System

43

ICX-50-700

ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface

44

ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface

45

Extension Name Assignment

Large-Display Phone Example

51

Small-Display Phone Example

52

Extension Name Assignments

50

Extension Names

Setting

89

Extension Restriction COS

32

Extension Timers

35

F

Facilities

Network

56

Feature Access Codes

FF Key Assignment

165

FF Key Assignment

Feature Access Codes

165

FF Key Extender

DSS/72

161

EM/24

162

FF Keys

163

Flash Send

SLT

295

Flash Signal

DSLT

246

Key Telephone

162

Flash Transfer

Network

57

Flexible Function Keys

163

Flexible Numbering Plan

45

Flexible Slot

Free Slot

46

Floating Hold

DSLT

232

Key Telephone

134

SLT

282

Virtual

71

Forwarding

All Calls

DSLT

227

Key Telephone

129

SLT

277

Busy

DSLT

228

Key Telephone

130

SLT

278

Do-Not-Disturb

DSLT

230

Key Telephone

132

SLT

280

DSLT

227

ICX (International) issued October 2000

Index

325

Index

Key Telephone

129

No Answer

DSLT

229

Key Telephone

131

SLT

279

SLT

277

Free Slot

46

G

Groups

Hunt Group

Circular

47

Next Extension

47

Pilot Distributed

46

Pilot Terminal

46

Switch Back

47

Hunting

46

MCO Tenant Group

48

H

Handset

Mute Function

179

Handsfree

Answerback

Key Telephone

169

Operation

Key Telephone

170

Handsfree Answerback

Key Telephone

169

Handsfree Operation

Key Telephone

170

Headset

Operation

Key Telephone

170

Headset Operation

Key Telephone

170

High Priority Message Waiting

Voice Mail (Third Party)

74

Hold

Broker’s Hold

DSLT

234

Key Telephone

135

SLT

284

Exclusive Hold

DSLT

233

Key Telephone

135

SLT

283

Floating Hold

DSLT

232

Key Telephone

134

326 ICX (International) issued October 2000

I

SLT

282

Internal Hold Tone

48

Music

49

Network

57

System Hold

DSLT

231

Key Telephone

133

SLT

281

Hot Dial Pad

Key Telephone

171

Hot Line

DSLT

246

Key Telephone

172

Hunt Group

Circular

47

Next Extension

47

Pilot Distributed

46

Pilot Terminal

46

Switch Back

47

Hunting Groups

46

ID Codes

Setting

82

Intercom Calling

DSLT

247

Key Telephone

172

SLT

296

Tone Calling

DSLT

247

Key Telephone

172

SLT

296

Voice Calling

DSLT

247

Key Telephone

172

SLT

296

Interface

Extension

43

ISDN/BRI

44

ISDN/PRI

45

Trunk

67

Internal Hold Tone

System

48

ISDN Lines

QSIG

60

ISDN PRI Trunk Interface

68

ISDN/BRI S-Point Interface

Extension Interface

44

ISDN/PRI S-Point Interface

Extension Interface

45

Section 700 - Operation

ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

J

JTrunk Ringing Mode

Delayed Ringing

61

K

Key

ANSWER

164, 165

Voice Mail (Third Party) Transfer Key

75

Key Telephone

Illustration

120

Key Telephone Features

117

Absence Message

120

Account Codes

122

Attendant Group Calls

124

Auto Repeat Dial

125

Background Music

126

Busy Override

127

Call Forwarding

129

Call Hold

133

Call Pickup

139

Call Transfer

142

Callback Request

128

Caller ID Call Log

144

Camp-on (Call Waiting)

149

Conference Calls

151

Directory Numbers

153

Display Information

157

Do-Not-Distrub (DND)

159

DP to DTMF Signal Conversion

161

FF Keys

163

Flash Signal

162

Handsfree Answerback

169

Handsfree Operation

170

Headset Operation

170

Hot Dial Pad

171

Hot Line

172

Intercom Calling

172

Last Number Redial

173

Line Appearances

174

Message Key

177

Message Waiting/Callback

178

Mute Function

179

Offhook Monitor

180

Offhook Signalling

180

Offhook Voice Announce

181

One-Touch Keys

184

Onhook Dialling

185

Paging

Meet-Me Answer

186

Reset Call (Step Call)

204

ICX-50-700

Index

Ringing Line Preference

188

Speed Dialling

192

Station Lockout

202

Step Call (Reset Call)

204

Timed Reminder Call

205

Trunk Access

206

Trunk Queuing

209

Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page

210

Variable Mode

210

Voice Recognition

212

Volume Control

213

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service

214

Zip Mode

215

Key telephone features absence message

120

L

Large-Display Phone

Display Information

158

Example

Assigning Extension Names

51

Setting PSD Names

95

Main Menu Example

158

Last Number Redial

DSLT

247

Key Telephone

173

SLT

297

Line Appearances

Direct In Line Appearances

175

DSS/BLF Appearances

174

Key Telephone

174

Multi-CO (MCO)

176

List of features

15

Loop Start Trunk Interface

68

M

Maintenance

Power On

59

User

77

Manual Call Waiting

Camp-on

DSLT

241

Key Telephone

149

SLT

292

Manual Day/Night Mode

37

MCO Line Preference

Trunk Access

207

MCO Tenant Group

48

MCO Trunk Access

DSLT

264

ICX (International) issued October 2000 327

Index Section 700 - Operation

Key Telephone

208

SLT

311

MCO Trunk Access Codes

DSLT

264

Key Telephone

208

SLT

312

Meet-Me Answer

Paging

DSLT

251

Key Telephone

186

SLT

301

Memory Backup

49

Message Key

Message Wait Callback

177

Priorty Message Wait Callback

177

Setting ID Code

90

Message Key ID Code

Setting

90

Voice Mail (Third Party)

73, 74

Message Keys

Key Telephone

177

Message Wait Callback

Message Key

177

Message Waiting

High Priority

Voice Mail (Third Party)

74

Message Waiting/Callback

DSLT

248

Key Telephone

178

SLT

298

Messages

Absence

DSLT

219

Key Telephone

120

SLT

271

Absence Message

Message No. and Text

Key Telephone 121

Setting

Absence Messages

80

Setting Send Text Messages

99

Setting Text Message Replies

112

Text Message

Replies

149

Send

149

Mode Schedule

Schedule Patterns - Addresses/Values

93

Setting

91

Modes

Automatic Day/Night

40

Day of Week

Addresses

87

Setting

85

Day, Day 2

37

328 ICX (International) issued October 2000

Day/Night System

36

Exception Day

Setting

87

Manual Day/Night

37

Night, Night 1, Night 2

37

Special Day

Setting

100

Start Time/Mode - Addresses/Values

102

MOH

27

Internal Hold Tone

48

MOH (Music-on-Hold)

49

Multi-CO (MCO) Appearances

176

Multiple Ringing

Ringing Types

71

Music

Background

DSLT

225

Key Telephone

126

Music-on-Hold (Background)

DSLT

225

Key Telephone

126

Music-on-Hold (MOH)

49

Internal Hold Tone

48

Mute Function

Key Telephone

179

N

Name Assignments

50

Extension

50

Speed Dial

54, 197

Names

Extension

89

Network

56, 57

Network Attendant Reversion

56

Network Call Routing

56

Network Call Transfer

56

Network Extension Calling

56, 57

Network Facilities

56

Attendant Reversion

56

Network Call Routing

56

Network Call Transfer

56

Network Extension Calling

56, 57

Network Flash Transfer

57

Network Hold

57

Network Paging

57

Network Transfer Recall

58

Tandem Connection

58

Network Flash Transfer

57

Network Hold

57

Network Paging

57

Network Transfer Recall

58

Next Extension/Hunt Group

47

ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Night Mode

Automatic

40

Manual

37

Night, Night 2, Night 3

37

Non-Blocking Architecture

58

Non-Verified Account Codes

Key Telephone

123

SLT

273

Non-Verified ID Account Codes

DSLT

222

Numbering Plan

Flexible

45

O

Offhook

Monitor

Key Telephone

180

Signalling

DSLT

249

Key Telephone

180

SLT

299

Voice Announce

DSLT

250

Key Telephone

181

SLT

300

Offhook Monitor

Key Telephone

180

Offhook Signalling

DSLT

249

Key Telephone

180

SLT

299

Offhook Voice Announce

DSLT

250

Key Telephone

181

SLT

300

One-Touch Keys

184

Onhook Dialling

DSLT

251

Key Telephone

185

Override

SSD TRS

65

P

Pad

Digital

40

Pad Class

40

Paging

DSLT

251

Key Telephone

186

Meet-Me Answer

ICX-50-700

DSLT

251

Key Telephone

186

SLT

301

Network

57

SLT

301

PBX Compatability

31

PC-Based Customizing Tool

60

Personal Speed Dial (PSD)

Setting Names

93

Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Numbers

Setting

98

Personal Speed Dialling (PSD)

DSLT

255

Key Telephone

192

SLT

304

Pickup

DSLT

236

Extension Direct Pickup

DSLT

237

Key Telephone

140

SLT

287

Extension Group Pickup

All Calls

DSLT 236

Key Telephone 139

SLT 286

DSLT

236

External Calls

DSLT 236

Key Telephone 139

SLT 286

Key Telephone

139

SLT

286

Specific Group

DSLT 236

Key Telephone 139

SLT 286

Key Telephone

139

SLT

286

Trunk Direct Pickup

DSLT

238

Key Telephone

141

Trunk Group Pickup

DSLT

237

Key Telephone

140

SLT

288

Pilot Distributed Hunt Group

46

Pilot Terminal Hunt Group

46

Port

Virtual

71

Power Failure Transfer

58

Power On Maintenance

59

ICX (International) issued October 2000

Index

329

Index

Priority Message Wait Callback

Message Key

177

Programing Devices

Telephone

59

Programming Devices

59

PC-Based Customizing Tool

60

Programming Telephone

59

Progress Tones

29

PSD (Personal Speed Dial)

Setting Names

93

Large-Display Phone Example

95

Small-Display Phone Example

96

Setting Numbers

98

Q

QSIG ISDN Lines

60

R

Redial

Last Number

DSLT

247

Key Telephone

173

SLT

297

Redial Key

Busy Tone

DSLT

224

Key Telephone

125

Last Number

DSLT

247

Key Telephone

173

RELEASE Key

165

Reset Call (Step Call)

DSLT

261

Key Telephone

204

SLT

309

Restriction

Ext to Ext COS

32

Ringing

Alarm

63

BLF

62

BLF Delayed

62

Day

61

DDI

68

DDI (DID) Day/Night

61

DDI (DID) Delayed

62

Delayed

61

DISA

69

Distinctive

42

DL

69

Slide

62

330

Section 700 - Operation

Ringing Line Preference

188

Ringing Modes

60

Ringing Types

68

DDI Ringing

68

DISA

69

Multiple Ringing

71

Room monitoring using Key Telephone

188, 252

Room monitoring using SLT

302

S

SBS Telephones

317

Schedule

Setting

91

Security

Data

36

Send Text Messages

Setting

99

Sensor

Doorphone

43

Separation

BGM/MOH

27

Set Absence Messages

80

Set Call Forward Busy Destination Extension

81

Set Call Forward ID Code for Voice Mail

82

Set Call Forward No Answer Destination Extension

83

Set Caller ID Logging Extensions

84

Set Day of Week Mode

85

Set Exception Day Mode

87

Set Extension Names

89

Set Message Key ID Code

90

Set Mode Schedule

91

Set Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Names

93

Large-Display Phone Example

95

Small-Display Phone Example

96

Set Personal Speed Dial (PSD) Numbers

98

Set Send Text Messages

99

Set Special Day Mode

100

Set System Date/Time/Day

107

Set System Speed Dial (SSD) Index

108

Set System Speed Dial (SSD) Names

109

Set System Speed Dial (SSD) Numbers

111

Set Text Message Replies

112

Set Verified ID Codes

113

Set Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes

115

Signal Conversion

DP to DTMF

DSLT

245

Key Telephone

161

Silent Monitor

190

Single Line Telephone (SLT) Features

269

Absence Message

271

Account Codes

272

ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation Index

Attendant Group Calls

275

Busy Override

275

Call Forwarding

277

Call Pickup

286

Call Transfer

289

Callback Request

276

Camp-on (Call Waiting)

291

Conference Calls

293

Do-Not-Distrub (DND)

294

Flash Send

295

Intercom Calling

296

Last Number Redial

297

Message Waiting/Callback

298

Offhook Signalling

299

Offhook Voice Announce

300

Paging

Meet-Me Answer

301

Speed Dialling

303

Station Lockout

307

Step Call (Reset Call)

309

Timed Reminder

309

Trunk Access

310

Trunk Queuing

312

Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page

313

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service

314

Single Line Telephone (SLT)Features

Call Hold

281

Slide Ringing

62

SLT Flash Send

295

Small-Display Phone

Display Information

159

Example

Assigning Extension Names

52

Setting PSD Names

96

Menu Example

159

SMDR (Call Logging)

Output data format

64

Priority of Incoming Call Condition Codes

64

Priority of Outgoing Call Condition Codes

63

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Call Logging

63

Call Records

63

Software Version

11

Special Day Mode

Setting

100

Start Time/Mode - Addresses/Values

102

Speed Dial Linking

DSLT

258

Key Telephone

196

SLT

306

Speed Dial Name Assignments

54, 197

Speed Dialing

DSLT

255

Speed Dialling

ICX-50-700

DSLT

255

Key Telephone

192

Personal

DSLT

255

Key Telephone

192

SLT

304

SLT

303

System

DSLT

257

Key Telephone

194

SLT

305

S-Point Interface

ISDN/BRI

44

ISDN/PRI

45

SSD (System Speed Dial)

Setting Names

109

Setting Numbers

111

Setting SSD Index

108

SSD TRS Override

65

Station Lockout

Key Telephone

202

SLT

307

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Call Logging

63

Call Records

63

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging

Output Format

64

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) (Call Logging)

Priority of Incoming Call Condition Codes

64

Priority of Outgoing Call Condition Codes

63

Station Timers

35

Class Assignment

35

Step Call (Reset Call)

DSLT

261

Key Telephone

204

SLT

309

Supervised Call Transfer

DSLT

239

Key Telephone

142

SLT

289

Switch Back Hunt Group

47

System

Background Music

27

System Architecture

Non-Blocking

58

System Features

21

System Hold

DSLT

231

Key Telephone

133

SLT

281

System Mode

Day

37

ICX (International) issued October 2000 331

Index Section 700 - Operation

Day/Night

36

Night

37

System Speed Dial (SSD)

Setting Names

109

Setting Numbers

111

Setting SSD Index

108

TRS Override

65

System Speed Dialling (SSD)

DSLT

257

Key Telephone

194

SLT

305

T

Tandem Connection

58

Telephone Programming

59

Tenant Group

MCO

48

Tenant Operation

MCO

48

Text Message Replies

Setting

112

Text Messages

Replies

149

Send

149

Setting Replies

112

Setting Send Text Messages

99

Third Party Voice Mail

72

Time

Setting

107

Timed Reminder Call

DSLT

262

Key Telephone

205

SLT

309

Timers

Station

35

Toll Restriction Service (TRS) (Call Barring)

65

Tone

Internal Hold

48

Tone Calling

Intercom Calling

DSLT

247

Key Telephone

172

SLT

296

Tones

Call Progress

29

Transfer

Automatic Trunk To Trunk

27

Camping on Busy Extension

DSLT

240

Key Telephone

143

SLT

291

DSLT

239

332

Key Telephone

142

Network Call

56

Network Flash

57

Power Failure

58

SLT

289

Supervised

DSLT

239

Key Telephone

142

SLT

289

Unsupervised

DSLT

239

Key Telephone

143

SLT

290

Transfer Key

Voice Mail (Third Party)

75

Transfer Recall

Network

58

TRS (Call Barring) Codes

Walking

115

TRS (Toll Restriction Service)

Call Barring

65

TRS Override

SSD

65

Trunk (Exchange Line) Key Trunk Access

206

Trunk (Exchange Line) Queuing

319

Trunk Access

CTrunk (Exchange Line) Key Trunk Access

206

Direct Trunk Access

DSLT

263

Key Telephone

207

SLT

311

DSLT

263

Key Telephone

206

MCO

DSLT

264

Key Telephone

208

SLT

311

MCO Line Preference

207

SLT

310

Trunk COS

Enable/Disable Features

32

Trunk Direct Pickup

DSLT

238

Key Telephone

141

Trunk Group Pickup

DSLT

237

Key Telephone

140

SLT

288

Trunk Interface

67

DDI

67

Loop Start

68

Trunk Interface - DDI

67

Trunk Interface - ISDN PRI

68

Trunk Interface - Loop Start

68

ICX (International) issued October 2000 ICX-50-700

Section 700 - Operation

Trunk Queuing

DSLT

265

Key Telephone

209

SLT

312

Trunk Ringing

DDI (DID) Day/Night

61

Ringing Modes

60

Trunk Ringing Mode

Alarm Ringing

63

BLF Delayed Ringing

62

BLF Ringing

62

Day Ringing

61

DDI (DID) Delayed Ringing

62

Slide Ringing

62

Trunk to Trunk Restriction COS

35

Trunk To Trunk Transfer

Automatic

27

Trunk/Tie COS

32

U

UNA to Page

DSLT

265

Key Telephone

210

SLT

313

Universal Night Answer (UNA) to Page

DSLT

265

Key Telephone

210

SLT

313

Unsupervised Call Transfer

DSLT

239

Key Telephone

143

SLT

290

User Maintenance

77

Introduction

77

User Programming

79

V

Variable Mode

210

VB-9 Telephones

317

Verified ID Account Codes

222

Key Telephone

123

SLT

273

Verified ID Codes

Setting

113

Virtual Extension

Virtual Port

71

Virtual Port

71

Floating Hold

71

Virtual Extension

71

Voice Calling

ICX-50-700 ICX (International) issued October 2000

Index

Intercom Calling

DSLT

247

Key Telephone

172

SLT

296

Voice Mail

Built-In Voice Mail Unit

28

Call Forward ID Code (Third Party)

72

Voice Mail (Third Party)

Answer Supervision

72

CLI/DDI Voice Mail ID Code

73

Disconnect Signal

74

High Priority Message Waiting

74

Message Key ID Code

74

Voice Mail (Third Party) Transfer Key

75

Voice Mail ID Codes

Setting

82

Voice Mail Integration

Third Party

72

Voice Recognition

212

Volume Control

213

W

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Class of Service

Key Telephone

214

SLT

314

Walking TRS (Call Barring) Codes

Setting

115

Walking TRS Class of Service

DSLT

266

Z

Zip Mode

215

Panasonic Telephone Systems

www.voicesonic.com

Phone 877-289-2829

See More

Panasonic Manuals

333

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents